JP6332858B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine such as a so-called ball-type game machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko game machine”) or a so-called rotary game machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachi-slot game machine”).

  In a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined control body outputs presentation control data as the game progresses, and a predetermined presentation device that receives the presentation control data executes the presentation operation, thereby making it difficult for the player to feel bored. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-192783 A

  However, if the player has continued to play the game for a while, the player may gradually get used to the rendering operation of the rendering device and feel bored.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game by letting the player experience that the response of the staging device has suddenly improved when a predetermined condition is established.

  In order to achieve the above-described object, the gaming machine of the present invention executes a game control means for controlling the progress of a game, a presentation means for performing a presentation operation (corresponding to the presentation device), and a presentation operation by the presentation means. And an effect control means for controlling the effect operation by outputting effect control data to the effect operation executing means in response to an instruction from the game control means, the effect control means comprising: When controlling the presentation operation of the plurality of presentation means and the information storage means in which the presentation control data can be temporarily stored, in the normal time, the plurality of presentation means are controlled in synchronization with the same period. Although the production control data is extracted from the information storage means at the same time, some production means among the plurality of production means are triggered when a predetermined condition is established. Response control means for starting the effect control at a timing different from that of the other effect means by extracting the effect control data from the information storage means at a timing different from that of the effect means. It is characterized by that.

  First, under such a configuration, when controlling the rendering operation of a plurality of rendering means, in the normal time, the rendering is controlled from the information storage means so that the rendering effects are controlled in synchronization with the simultaneous period. It is assumed that control data is extracted. Under such a premise, the effect control means controls the effect from the information storage means at a timing different from other effect means for some effect means among a plurality of effect means when a predetermined condition is met. By extracting the data, the start timing of the rendering operation related to the part of the presentation means that receives the data is made different from that of the other presentation means, and the presentation control is performed at a timing different from that of the other presentation means. To start. In this way, a player who was accustomed to the performance that was originally delayed by the predetermined delay amount experienced that the response of the performance means suddenly improved when the predetermined condition was met. However, the amusement of the game is improved by being surprised at the sudden action of the production means.

  Here, when the gaming machine of the present invention is a ball-type game machine as an example, the ball-type game machine has a launching means for launching a game ball as a game medium into a game area of the game board, and the game When the game medium is received at the start port formed in the area and the start condition is satisfied, it is then determined whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied. When the game control means for making a transition from a gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player and the start condition is established, then the effect control according to the established condition of the winning condition is controlled by the control of the game control means. The production control means for outputting the production command for the production, and the production operation execution means for executing the production operation in accordance with the production command when receiving the production command from the production control means. Characterized in that it obtain.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine of the present invention is a rotating game machine as an example, the rotating game machine includes a rotation display unit including a plurality of rotating bodies with a plurality of types of symbols, and the rotation display unit. A housing provided; a first operating means provided outside the housing; a plurality of second operating means provided outside the housing corresponding to the plurality of rotating bodies; Each of the rotating bodies is rotated according to the operation order of the plurality of second operating means by rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies when the first operating means is operated and the start condition is satisfied. A rotating body control means for stopping the rotation, a lottery means for executing an internal lottery for determining whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied when the first operating means is operated, and the predetermined If the winning conditions are met, then the normal gaming state A game state control means for shifting to a special game state that is more advantageous for the player, and an effect control for controlling the effect operation according to the establishment condition of the winning condition by the control of the game control means Means, display means for executing a display operation by the effect control means, and control of the game control means, within the symbol display area where the variation modes of the symbols attached to the plurality of rotating bodies are visible. It is characterized by comprising payout means for executing a game medium payout operation according to a combination of a plurality of stopped symbols.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by letting the player experience that the response of the staging device has suddenly improved when a predetermined condition is established.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko game machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko game machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko game machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko game machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from below after disassembling each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit of production | presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. FIG. 32 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. 31. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right view of a door lower right production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from back. It is CC sectional drawing in the door lower right effect unit of FIG.34 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body faces rearward. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base in (a), (b) from the back in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the top dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper tray ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from the front upper side, (b) is the perspective view seen from the front lower side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing device from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing device from the back side. It is a right view of a dispensing device. (A) is the perspective view at the time of non-ball removal seen from the front side of the dispensing device which cut the prize ball table box along line XX of FIG. 50, (b) is the perspective view at the time of ball removal. is there. (A) is the perspective view at the time of non-ball removal seen from the back side of the dispensing device which cut the prize ball back box along the YY line of FIG. 50, (b) is the perspective view at the time of ball removal. is there. (A) is a front view at the time of non-ball removal of the payout apparatus which cut | disconnected the prize ball table box along the XX line of FIG. 50, (b) is a prize ball along the YY line of FIG. It is a rear view at the time of the non-ball removal of the dispensing device which cut | disconnected the back box. It is explanatory drawing of the maintenance of a payout apparatus. It is a front view which shows the whole structure of the pachinko game machine with which the game board was mounted | worn to the main body frame. It is a front view which shows the structural example of a game board. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural examples, such as a payout control board. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a peripheral control board 4140 and a board connected to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 57. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor of the payout apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a touch-panel controller and a touch sensor periphery. It is a block diagram such as a memory map showing a configuration example of a prescribed storage area of liquid crystal and sound ROM. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the model information data prepared beforehand by the model information data area. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 70 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 69. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 72. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 76 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 75. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 76. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation angle switch log | history production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a spherical collision determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pay-out ball engagement operation determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere ball movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation | movement monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error cancellation operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal process (a) at the time of paying-out operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation process (a) from CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game preparation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game mode determination process. It is an example of the table used for the jackpot game state determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game process. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example regarding delay control. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that delay control using a pointer is implemented. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that delay control using a pointer is implemented. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a write-in control process. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that delay control by data movement is implemented. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that delay control by data movement is implemented. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that delay control by data movement is implemented. It is a figure which shows the 1st example of the response with respect to a player's operation on the assumption which implements delay control. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example of the response with respect to a player's operation on the assumption which implements delay control. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the display area of the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the behavior of a movable decoration body. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the behavior of a movable decoration body. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the behavior of a movable decoration body. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the drawing data of a frame buffer are taken out to a process buffer, and a desired video effect is performed with respect to drawing data in a process buffer. It is a figure which shows an example of the image | video before a desired image effect is given. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that a desired video effect is performed in the process buffer side. It is a figure which shows an example of the image | video after a desired image effect was given. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the drawing data of a frame buffer are taken out to a process buffer, and a desired material image is added and pasted in a process buffer. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the drawing data in which the desired material image was additionally pasted are returned to a frame buffer. It is a figure which shows an example of the image | video after a desired material image is additionally pasted. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that a part of drawing data of a frame buffer is taken out to a process buffer, and a video process is implemented in the processing buffer so that material images based on the part of the drawing data form a plurality of groups. It is a figure which shows an example of the image | video with which the some material image based on the said one part drawing data was given. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that preload is performed using a free time area | region. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that preload is performed using a free time area | region.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko gaming machine 1 as a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame, and FIG. 9 shows the pachinko gaming machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the outer frame and was seen from back.

  A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in a pachinko island facility (not shown) in a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed, and a door frame. 3 is detachably attached to the outer frame 2 and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven by a player.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the outer frame 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the member 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a square shape when viewed from the front, and a lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing game balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. A side unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game that is attached to the lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by a player to drive a ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that is attached to the lower part of the surface and fails to enter the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball of the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feeding unit 540 for feeding the ball to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. I have.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and that can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the front frame 2 and are rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door of the door frame 3, respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the frame side lower hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 600, a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a frame launcher 680 attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. 4, and A locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side The payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 that covers.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from a pachinko island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 in the left direction when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 having two ball guide passages extending to the left and right to guide the game ball and a game ball from the tank rail 803 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 to meander downward in a meandering manner 2 A ball guide unit 920 having a ball guide passage of a strip, and detachable from the dispensing unit base 801 below the ball guide unit 920. A payout device that pays out each game ball guided by the two ball guide paths of the ball guide unit 920 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 4110 accommodated in the payout control board box 950 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game balls are normally discharged according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. Or the upper full-ball path unit 850 to be discharged from either the full tank outlet, and the game ball attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and released from the normal outlet of the upper full-ball path unit 850 is guided forward. Then, the game ball released from the normal guideway and the full tank discharge port for guiding from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 is moved forward. Guide to and a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a full guide path guiding the full ball socket 528 of the door frame 3 from the front end. Note that a ball break switch 821 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball is provided in the two ball guide passages formed in the ball guide unit 920.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has a ball discharge passage 865 for discharging the game balls extracted from the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a lock member 870 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The game balls in the ball tank 802 flow into the payout device 830 through the tank rail 803 having two ball guide paths and the ball guide unit 920 having two ball guide paths. And when paying out the game balls that have flowed into the payout device 830 in the second row as prize balls, the game balls that have flowed in in the second row are paid out one by one to flow into the upper full ball path unit 850, When the game balls that have flowed into the payout device 830 in the second row are removed from the payout device 830, the game balls that have flowed in the second row are passed through the ball discharge passage 865 as a single row and discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. . (The game balls discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are supplied to a ball lifting device installed in a pachinko island facility (not shown)). As described above, the payout device 830 in the present embodiment also has a function of conversion of 2 items and 1 item.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 which is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board 931 inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has an interface inside. An interface control board box 940 in which a control board is housed, and a payout control housed in a power supply board box 930 and an interface control board box 940, and a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls inside. Board box 950

  The payout control board 4110 is provided with an operation switch 952 that also serves various functions, an error LED display 953 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. The operation part of the operation switch 952 is exposed from the payout control board box 950 and is operated by a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall. On the other hand, the error LED display 953 is not exposed from the payout control board box 950. A staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall can visually check the contents displayed on the error LED display 953 through a transparent cover body constituting the payout control board box 950.

  The operation switch 952 includes a RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and a microprocessor of a main control board (not shown) that controls the progress of the game housed in the main control board box provided in the game board 5 when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM built in, or when an error is notified by the error LED indicator 953 after the power is turned on, and is operated to cancel the error. It has a function of clearing the RAM when the power is turned on and a function of canceling the error after the power is turned on (after a period of time when the function is performed as the RAM clear).

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot and divides the game balls launched from the ball launching device 680 into the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having a guide rail 1001 for guiding the upper portion, a flat gaming panel 1100 which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and the rear side of the game panel 1100 A box-shaped board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower part of the board and opened upward, and a main control board that is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 and controls the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are housed inside. A main control board box 1300 and a table unit having a plurality of winning holes for receiving game balls which are attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and are driven into the game area 5a. A back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 on the upper side of the substrate holder 1200 and visible from the player side through the gaming panel 1100, It has.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A game ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the back after being disassembled as the main member.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 as viewed from the front, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to a rear cover lower part of the door frame base unit 100, a ball cover unit 540 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction with a vertically long rectangle as shown in FIGS. A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the front right view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 as viewed from the front and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and the glass frame 560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described in detail later, the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is arranged in an up-and-down direction and bulges forward, and can store a game ball, and an upper dish 201 and a lower dish 202. And a plate-shaped dish unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and can display an image. An operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 that can be operated by the player and an upper plate effect button 257, a plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 when viewed from the front. The door lower right effect unit 270 having the door lower right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the gaming state, and the door lower right effect unit 270 are covered from the front side. A transparent production unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removal unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower portion of the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 The lower dish ball removing unit 320 and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island facility of the game hall. And an upper dish top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 that is partially translucent and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. 360, a translucent top decorative member 370 attached to the left and right center on the front surface of 360, and a top speaker that is attached within the top decorative member 370 and outputs a high-frequency sound. And a door frame decorative board 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the right side decorative member 470 3 is mounted between a right speaker unit 246 having a right speaker (not shown) and a unit base 460 and a right side decorative member 470, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and is rotatably attached to the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle main body 502 and is attached to the handle main body 502 to detect the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor attached to the handle body 502 and detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and opened on the front side, as shown in FIGS. And a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal ball guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full sphere receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 when viewed from the front, and that can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that opens upward on the right side of the front of the ball receiving port 528 and receives a game ball (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a. The ball receiving port 530 opens to the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and releases the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the dish unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, etc., the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit body 542 and the box-shaped unit body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side opened, and an upper plate of the dish unit 200 opened forward. 201, a ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 that is capable of releasing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546, and opens backward, and a ball entrance And a ball discharge port 550 that is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered 546 and that opens forward under the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid for discharging the game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball that has entered from the ball entrance 546. And a switching mechanism that switches between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562, as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

[2-1. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after disassembling the main unit, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the rear after being decomposed into the main members. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the production operation unit broken down for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit broken down for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the mounting base unit disassembled, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as seen from below.

  FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit touch unit as seen from above and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as seen from below. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from above with the button unit disassembled, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 31 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is the effect operation in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the door lower right effect unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right effect unit, and FIG. 35 is a front view of the door lower right effect unit. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in the lower right door production unit of FIG. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the back. FIG. 42A is a front view of the door lower right effect unit in a state where the door lower right rotating body faces forward, and FIG. 42B is a front view of the door right lower rotating body facing rearward.

  FIG. 43A is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 43B is a perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 is an upper tray 201 that stores game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and to be driven into the game area 5 a, and a game that is disposed below the upper tray 201 and is supplied from the upper tray 201. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing a sphere. In addition, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the front upper part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side of the left and right center bulges forward greatly and the upper dish 201 And a lower plate body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  The dish unit 200 covers the production operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and the front and lower sides of the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 disposed on the right side of the dish operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit. An effect unit cover 300 that covers the front side of the plate unit base 210 and covers the front side of the plate 270, and a game ball that is mounted so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212 On the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 214 on the lower side Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Furthermore, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island facility of the game hall. The upper plate top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the plate unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission, and is attached to the left side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 at the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 and emits light forward. The dish unit left decorative board 345 having a plurality of irradiating LEDs and the rear side of the stage unit cover 300 and the lower right side of the door lower stage production unit 270 are attached to the front right side of the dish unit base 210 and forward. Dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs that can irradiate light, and the rear side of the dish unit base 210 Attached and before-upper decorative board 233, after-upper decorative board 235, upper dish liquid crystal board 241, vibration device 242, touch panel 246, effect button decoration board 251, effect button press sensor 258, door lower right relay A board 281, a dish unit left decoration board 345, and a dish unit relay board 347 that relays connection between the dish unit right decoration board 346 and a peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

[2-1a. Dish unit base]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view and extends back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth under the upper dish ball supply opening 210a. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending in the vertical direction, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; There is provided an upper dish ball feed opening 210d that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the ball supply opening 210c in the front view and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

  In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular through-hole 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front of the upper dish ball feed opening 210d, and a receptacle that protrudes forward from the bottom side of the through-hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the relief opening 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. A handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 passes through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the front of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c. , And a notch 210j that is notched forward from the rear end.

[2-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate body 212 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. ing. The upper plate body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is opened only to the left and rearward on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can be circulated. The upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the bottom surface is generally lower at the right end. More specifically, in a state where the upper plate body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is a game ball from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 210a from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball is received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed opening 210d.

  The upper plate body 212 includes a metal grounding metal 212b extending from the left and right centers to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown in the drawing, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), and the game ball can be contacted to remove static electricity charged in the game ball.

[2-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower dish body 214 of the dish unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a long rear end with respect to the front end, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear opened. The lower plate body 214 includes a ball hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface in the vertical direction and can be closed by the lower plate ball hole unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and can store the game balls below the tray unit 200 from the ball release holes 214a. Can be discharged.

[2-1d. Overall structure of production operation unit]
As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 in the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side when viewed from the front of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end in front view of the attachment base unit 220A.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 to be transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A and the dish unit base 210 side.

[2-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the production operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and an upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and can accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover that covers the front side of the front lens member 232, the front plate front decorative member 233 that is disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and includes a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And an upper dish decorative member 234 having translucency attached to the H.224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has an upper dish rear decorative board 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light upward, and an upper side of the upper dish rear decorative board 235. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 that is disposed on the unit cover 224 and has translucency, and is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and from the upper plate rear decoration board 235. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light and emitting an upper end linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper dish decoration member 236, and a button attachment member And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower from the front and rear substantially center to the front side, and the mounting base receiving portion 230a that passes through the mounting side receiving portion 230a. One through-hole 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed downward (see FIG. 33). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to the front, it extends at an angle so that it goes forward. Moreover, the cylindrical receiving part 230c is inclined and extended so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are slightly close to the lower ends (tips) with respect to the vertical of the surface of the attachment side receiving part 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes in a cylindrical shape one by one apart from the housing recess 231a that can accommodate the touch unit 220B and the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front-rear direction. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward and away from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and from the left and right centers on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a A central support protrusion 231d that protrudes upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e that protrude in a pyramid shape so as to narrow toward the bottom from the bottom of the housing recess 231a and are spaced apart from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is circularly penetrated up and down on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending from the upper and lower sides to the left and right of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the receiving recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are disposed. And a cutout portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, the receiving recess 231a is formed such that the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The lateral support pin 231 b is formed such that the distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a to the middle of the taper portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length is longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined so that the rear outer wall moves forward with respect to the bottom of the housing recess 231a. And extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the receiving protrusion 231e has a lower end inserted into the through-hole 230b of the mounting base 230, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for decorating the upper dish decoration member 236 and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper dish decoration member 236, and the light receiving part 237a and the light receiving part 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish decoration substrate 235. And a flat line-shaped light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the linear light-emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237b forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, guide the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b, and the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper dish ball removal button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and includes an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper dish 201 from the upper dish 201 to the lower dish 202 (removal). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends. Therefore, the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. To do. Thereby, the force from the receiving protrusion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it can be avoided that a large force is applied to the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is hardly damaged. .

[2-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220 </ b> B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 that is open on the upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 that is attached to the lower case 240 from the upper side, A pair of vibration devices 242 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 and the upper side of the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 and attached to the upper side. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open portion, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from above and controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the upper surfaces of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof property is provided which extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The lower case 240 has an outer shape that corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 231a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-like protruding portion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically opened and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibration device attachment portion 240e to which the vibration device 242 is attached and disposed near the substrate attachment portion 240a between the pair of damper attachment recesses 240c in the protrusion 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at the substantially upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity being eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and is formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. A chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 32) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 is such that the distal end side can pass through the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231 and the proximal end side (lower side) from the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a capacitive sensor sheet 246b that is provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, a frame-shaped protective cover 246c that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet, It has.

  The touch unit 220B can attach the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. Thereby, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. In a state where the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protruding.

  In the touch unit 220 </ b> B, the vibration drive motor 242 a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can independently generate vibrations.

  Further, the touch unit 220 </ b> B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Further, since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rear side of the touch unit 220B, when liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid is prevented from entering the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the ingress of liquid.

[2-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the button unit 220 </ b> C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit mounting portion 231 g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. And a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the stage button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached to the upper side. A spring member 254 that is energized, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute electrodes disposed above the light guide member 255. A sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a that extend outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and are attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b that extends inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a cylindrical lower tube portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tube-shaped upper tube portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tube portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b, has a lower end capable of passing through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250, protrudes outward from the lower end, and can engage (contact) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. A pair of engaging claw portions 253c and an upper cylindrical portion 253b that protrude radially outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250 A plurality of flat plate-like contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower tube portion 253a and the upper tube portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The spring member 254 has a lower end abutted against the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit main body 250, and an upper end supported by a plurality of abutting pieces 253 d on the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253 from the lower surface of the disk base body 255a and the lower surface of the main body portion 255a. And a plurality of cylindrical light guide portions 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusing lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. These button bases 253 and the like are such that the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are Engagement with the lower surface of 250 restricts further elevation, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. Then, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220 </ b> C can decorate the upper plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

[2-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 32, the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment has the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240 c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220 </ b> B in an assembled state from the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since this also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. In addition, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom face of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231 i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231 b and the tapered portion 243 d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243 c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. Projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on the left and right sides.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is constricted downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c constricted downward in the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A. The lower end of the full pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21 and the like, the production operation unit 220 has a linear upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B ( It is exposed in a band shape. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper dish rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper dish ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper dish rear decoration member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and can be enjoyed.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and by allowing touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 to be accepted, the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported in a state of being lifted from the unit case 231 by the plurality of dampers 222, and therefore the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 is produced, the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration device 242 so that the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. Even if the operation button of the image is operated to the player, the player can be surprised by illusioning that the actual operation button is operated. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertain.

  Further, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player can press the upper plate production button 257 according to the gaming state, and the upper plate production button 257 can be operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only have a touch on the touch panel 246, so that the operation feeling is less than that of the actual operation buttons. However, the upper plate effect button 257 is actually pressed. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. .

  Since the production operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game can be performed even during production using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the rendering operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The impact can be absorbed to some extent by force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is struck, it is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 is compressed downward. Thereby, in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b, the shock from the touch unit 220B is also absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces on both the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thereby, the impact from the touch unit 220 </ b> B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220 </ b> B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the center support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and from the touch unit 220B. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, the receiving projection 231e is directed to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the transmission to the mounting base 230 is arranged in layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be made difficult to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the production operation unit 220 has a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the post-upper decorative board 235 according to the gaming state. The upper end of 237b can be emitted linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a on the back plate decoration board 235 decorates the back plate decoration member 236 disposed on the rear side of the touch unit 220B (on the rear side of the linear light emitting portion 237b). Can be made. By decorating the back plate decoration member 236 with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the presentation presented by the presentation operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to an upper plate lower covering portion 262, which will be described later, of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. The waterproof seal 248 is pasted on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thereby, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from generating a malfunction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

[2-1e. Dish unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends in the left and right directions, and the left and right centers bulge forward, and is formed in a shell shape that is open to the rear. . The dish unit cover 260 is opened to the front substantially at the center of the left and right, and a lower dish opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the dish unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) on the inner peripheral wall of the lower dish opening 261. Are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front of the lower plate opening portion 261 and the lower plate opening portion 261 and covers the lower side of the upper plate body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220. A speaker grille 263 that transmits sound from the speakers, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged on the upper side of the speaker grille 263 and is lit and decorated by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and a lower dish opening 261 arranged on the right side of the front view. The handle unit 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  In the lower dish opening 261, the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower dish body 214. The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. Moreover, the right side of the front view is substantially translucent.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed at an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 so that the dish unit cover 260 can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

[2-1f. Door lower right production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is arranged on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 220, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotator 270A for luminescent decoration is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 so as to close the escape opening 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. Door lower right drive motor 272, drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of door lower right drive motor 272, driven gear 274 meshed with drive gear 273 and attached to door lower right rotary body 270A, driven A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right bearing member 276. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotating body 270A on the opposite side of the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side when viewed from the front of the door lower right rotating body 270A, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front surface A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decoration board 280, and a door lower right relay board 281 for relaying connection between a door lower rotary body decoration board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) to be described later. .

  The lower right door rotator 270A constitutes the outer shell and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is hemispherical, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutout portions 285a and 286a around the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285b. A heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction on a surface of a hemispherical shell having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  40 and 41, the rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower right rotary body decoration board 291. A columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and has a tip attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 are: A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is open in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring of the first reflector 295. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat ribs extending radially.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape from the annular upper portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A and the upper right portion of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a obliquely from the upper right portion when viewed from the front. A first projecting piece 271b projecting in the form of a plate, a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a flat plate shape from a portion opposite to the first projecting piece 271b on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a, and a second projecting piece 271c And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can support the tip end of the first fixed shaft member 292 in a non-rotatable manner by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotator 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 42A) and a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 42B). Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 according to the gaming state, and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces the front. Depending on whether or not, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from falling.

  In addition, the door lower right effect unit 270 has the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A mounted non-rotatably. When the lower rotating body decorative board 291 (LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 Since the direction of light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is illuminated and decorated so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED on the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Or by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in rainbow colors, and the player can be entertained.

[2-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the production unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower right door rotation body 270A in the lower right door production unit 270. The decorative unit 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side when viewed from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and penetrates back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The production unit cover 300 has a translucent shape as a whole with a container shape opened at the rear. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is illuminated and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

[2-1h. Upper dish ball removal unit]
43 to 45, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 that is attached to a position that is upper left in front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and that rotates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member A first spring member 314 that urges 313 in the direction in which the upper pan ball removal button 239 rises.

  The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feeding port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. An upper dish ball removal slider 316 disposed between the plate unit base 315 and the rear base member 315 so as to be movable up and down, and the pressure transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper side from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311. The front base member 312 and a pair of extensions extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protruding piece 312b, the shaft support portion 312c recessed in a U-shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are provided, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-like spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmission member 313 includes a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a that is rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension that extends rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upwardly extending piece 313c that extends upward in the form of a flat plate from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the protruding piece 313b and the rearwardly extending piece 313b and that can contact the lower end of the extending piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearward extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side of the shaft portion 313a near the left end in front view. And a hook-like spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper dish ball removal slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210, and is provided with a base part 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and spaced from the left and right at the front surface of the base part 315a. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to circulate.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d that extends downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved backward. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the one guide path 315d and extends leftward in front view, the left end is opened leftward, and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the guide passage 315e and an L-shaped second guide passage 315e. There is provided an opening 315g that penetrates, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and that locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 43B, the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a notch 210j of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper plate ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate shape, a slider base 316a that is slidably supported by the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a dish from the left to the front from the center in front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-like spring mechanism that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and that engages the lower end of the second spring member 317. A stop portion 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removal unit 310, the upper inlet 315 c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right side as viewed from the front of the guide passage part 212 a of the upper dish body 212 in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 through the first guide path 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper dish ball removal unit 310 presses the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward as the pressing force transmitting member 313 rotates, the upper piece of ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper dishball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper plate ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315d side communicates with the second guiding path 315e side. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 239 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 316 and the upper dish ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It is possible to return to the original state.

[2-1i. Lower dish ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower dish body 214 is attached. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the hole 214a, and a flat slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 in a position where the opening 321a is opened against the urging force of the spring member 324; It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removal base 321 to the lower dish body 214, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower dish ball removal base 321 and the lower dish body 214 in a lateral direction. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a that is held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that protrude from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding projection 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325b and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding projection 322a and The nail 325b is kept closed. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, and the holding projection 322a is released.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 320 has a slide lid 322 between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in the front view. Thus, the game balls in the lower tray 202 do not fall downward from the ball release holes 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower tray 202.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 passes through the ball removal hole 214a and the opening 321a and can be pulled out below the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be extracted. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left side, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, the holding projection 322a is released, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right side by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. In this manner, by operating the knob 323 of the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower dish 202, or the game balls stored in the lower dish 202 can be extracted.

[2-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface in the vicinity of the right end of the rendering operation unit 220 and has translucency, A ball rental button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the ball rental button 332 and operable by the player; And a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333. A CR unit lamp is disposed in the vicinity of the display unit 334, and the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp can be viewed from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331.

  When the ball lending operation unit 330 pushes the ball lending button 332 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ball lending operation unit 330 The unit 200 can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the cash balance and prepaid card inserted after the remaining portion of the loaned portion is drawn back are returned. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[2-1k. Top plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a light-transmitting upper dish top lens. 340a and an upper plate top decorative board 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decoration member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper dish top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 220, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the like. By lighting 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the production operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the production presented by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

  In the tray unit 200 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 is a storage tray, the tray unit 200 of the present embodiment is in the bulging portion, and the touch unit 220B (upper liquid crystal display device 244) of the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is. In the effect presentation means, the post-upper decoration board 235, the post-upper decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the upper dish top decoration member 340 of the present embodiment correspond to the light emitters, respectively.

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is applied to the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with a game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the area 5a, the outer side of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 on the side closer to the game area 5a The band-shaped linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish decoration member 236, the upper dish top decoration member 340, and the like are caused to emit light along the periphery, so that the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a. However, the light of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 entering from the outside of the line of sight (field of view) can be noticed, and the player's line of sight (interest) is expressed by the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 2. It is possible to attract to 4 side. Accordingly, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when presenting an effect such as an image according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, so that the player uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to emit light. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 includes the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the gaming state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, the dish unit 200 is disposed outside the gaming area 5a. Since the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is used to indicate the arrival of a chance, a game in the game area 5a and an effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a are given to the player. Both can be cared about. Therefore, by making the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper liquid crystal display device 244) care, it is possible to entertain a tight game with a sense of speed and reduce the interest of the player. In addition, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, thereby causing the player to make the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 emit light. It is possible to attract attention and to make the player entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of the opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside and outside of the game area 5a may be concerned, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on both, and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light, and the game in the game area 5a can be enjoyed. In addition, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to make the game sharp and hard to get tired.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is easily hidden by a player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is difficult to see from other players next to or behind. The presentation presented by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable by being looked at by other players and to reduce the interest, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light when presenting the effect by 244, it is difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous than the case where light is emitted in a dotted manner, and the player Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237, etc. It can suppress that it falls. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, it becomes a light-emission mode different from light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies, and can be reduced from being mistaken for light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies, The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear position close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, Light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the player's field of view, and the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed, and the effect of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, an effect operation unit 220 having an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 or the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 or the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. Since the player for confirming the amount of game balls to be turned turns the line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It becomes easy to enter the field of view and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Accordingly, when the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the effect operation unit 220 is arranged below the game area 5a, and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, so that it is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to get into the eyes, and it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and the player can be surely paid attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the operation unit 220 entertain.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 220 (top plate liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the center of the player's line of sight is in any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can be surely noticed by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the production by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that interest falls.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 220 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the production by the image, the production can be performed by causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various productions. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper dish ball removal button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is disposed between the guide passage section 212a and the guide passage section 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 The timing of the touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper lower plate covering portion 262 of the upper plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. Since the waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 touches the outside air on the upper plate body 212 or the surface of the game ball. Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown. However, the gaming machine is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[3. Dispensing device]
Next, the payout device 830 arranged on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 920 shown in FIG. 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 54. 47 is a perspective view (a) of the dispensing device viewed from the upper front side, and a perspective view (b) of the dispensing device viewed from the lower front side, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device viewed from the front side. FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device viewed from the back side, FIG. 50 is a right side view of the payout device, and FIG. 51 is a view of the payout device with the prize ball table box cut along the line XX in FIG. FIGS. 52A and 52B are a perspective view when the ball is removed and a perspective view when the ball is removed as seen from the front side, and FIG. 52 is a payout device in which the prize ball back box is cut along line YY in FIG. FIGS. 53A and 53B are a perspective view when the ball is removed and a perspective view when the ball is removed, and FIG. 53 is a payout with the prize ball table box cut along the line XX in FIG. Front view at the time of non-ball removal of the device (a), spine at the time of non-ball removal of the payout device in which the prize ball back box is cut along the YY line of FIG. A diagram (b), FIG. 54 is an explanatory view of the maintenance of the dispensing device. 51 (a), 51 (b), and 53 (a), the award ball intermediate gear, the detection disk, and the like are indicated by imaginary lines for easy viewing of the drawings.

  The payout device 830 includes a box-shaped prize ball table box 831 that is open at the rear where a bent path 831b, a prize ball path 831c, and a ball extraction path 831d are formed by a pair of bent path walls 831a. A box-like shape that covers the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831 and that is open at the front where a bent passage 832b, a prize ball passage 832c, and a ball passage 832d are formed by a pair of bent passage walls 832a. A prize ball back box 832 and a bent path formed in the game ball and the prize ball back box 832 passing through a bent path 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831 when the prize ball back box 832 is attached to the prize ball front box 831. A prize ball inner partition plate 833 for preventing the game balls passing through 832b from entering each other and a game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831 are formed in the prize ball table box 831. A prize ball release lever 834 for discharging to the ball extraction path 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832 while discharging to the ball extraction path 831d and passing the game ball passing through the bent path 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 And a gear group (a prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841, and a detection disk 842, which will be described later), which cover the front surface of the prize ball table box 831 and are provided in the surface area of the prize ball table box 831. .) And a box-shaped prize ball gear cover 835 that is opened at the rear. The bent passage 832b, the prize ball passage 832c, and the ball passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832 correspond to the bent passage 831b, the prize ball passage 831c, and the ball passage 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831. It is provided at each position. Here, the configuration of the prize ball front box 831, the prize ball back box 832, the prize ball middle partition plate 833, the prize ball removal lever 834, and the prize ball gear cover 835 will be described, followed by the fixed position of the sprocket and the payout The maintenance of the apparatus will be described.

[3-1. Prize ball table box]
First, the configuration of the prize ball table box 831 will be described. The prize ball table box 831 is formed in a rectangular box shape having an opening at the back, and is directed from the bottom of the prize ball table box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832 side. A bent passage 831b is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 831a projecting. Of the pair of bent passage walls 831a, one of the bent passage walls 831a is greatly leftward from the middle of the upper part of the prize ball table box 831 to the downstream side when viewed from the front of the prize ball table box 831. The curved side wall 831a of the other side of the bent ball wall 831a is viewed from the front while the curved side wall also serves as the left side wall of the prize ball table box 831 from before the downstream end to the downstream end. A notch 831e is formed in a portion that turns substantially right from the middle of the prize ball table box 831 to the downstream side from the upper middle to the downstream side, and the right edge of the prize ball table box 831 extends from the middle to the downstream end. It also serves as a side wall.

  A support shaft 831f projects from the bottom of the prize ball front box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832 at the upper end of the notch 831e formed in the other bent passage wall 831a. A ball punch piece 836 that can be swung by being attached is attached. The ball cut piece 836 is formed by bending a shaft portion 836a into which a support shaft 831f is inserted at one end and the upstream side and the downstream side of the other bent passage wall 831a so as to be flush with each other. The side wall 836b that can block the portion 831e is formed integrally, and is opposite to the rolling surface of the side wall 836b on which the game ball rolls on the upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a. Reinforcing ribs 836c are formed on the side surface. A support shaft 832f protruding from a later-described prize ball back box 832 is inserted into the other end of the ball removal piece 836, and a side wall portion 836b of the ball removal piece 836 projects into the later-described prize ball back box 832. The side wall of the other bent passage wall 832a provided is curved so that the upstream side and the downstream side are flush with each other.

  Below the notch portion 831e formed in the other bent passage wall 831a, a passage partition wall 831g is formed so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 831a that are divided from the middle to the downstream end of the prize ball table box 831. Is formed. That is, two passages are constituted by the bent passage wall 831a and the passage partition wall 831g that are bent in the left-right direction from the middle of the prize ball front box 831, one passage constitutes the bent passage 831b, and the other passage is the ball extraction. A passage 831d is formed. The passage partition wall 831g is a recessed space that constitutes a board mounting / accommodating space 831h for accommodating and mounting a prize-ball case inner board 847 on which a rotation angle switch 846 for detecting a rotational position of a sprocket 837 described later is mounted. Is formed from the surface of the prize ball table box 831 toward the rear. The board mounting / accommodating space 831h is a passage partition wall 831g constituting the bent passage 831b, and a sprocket 837 for receiving a game ball passing through the bent passage 831b and sending it to the prize ball passage 831c is disposed on the downstream side of the bent passage 831b. Is formed so as to constitute a ball delivery space 831k.

  A passage partition wall 831i is formed so as to project from the bottom of the prize ball front box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832 from the lower part of the ball delivery space 831k to the downstream end of the prize ball front box 831. That is, a path for sending out the game ball received by the concave portion 837a of the sprocket 837 along the downstream bent passage wall 831a that is turned to the left from the middle of the prize ball table box 831 and the middle from the middle of the prize ball table box 831 A bent curved passage wall 831a and a passage defined by a passage partition wall 831i are formed in communication with each other to form a prize ball passage 831c.

  As described above, the sprocket 837 is rotatably disposed in the ball delivery space 831k. In the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k, three concave portions 837a into which game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees. Note that a ball delivery space 832k, which will be described later, is also formed in the prize ball back box 832 that covers the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. In this ball delivery space 832k, a sprocket 837 is rotatably arranged. In the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 832k, three concave portions 837b into which game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees. That is, the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 are the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. The sprocket 837 disposed at the front is disposed in front of the three recesses 837b. Further, three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 and three of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 The recesses 837b are arranged 60 ° apart from each other.

  On the downstream side of the prize ball passage 831c, there is a guide piece 831m for guiding the game ball sent out by the sprocket 837 to a ball inlet (not shown) provided in the upper full ball path unit 850 shown in FIG. Projecting from the bottom of the box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832 side. A counting switch 838 for detecting a game ball guided by the guiding protrusion 831m is disposed below the guiding protrusion 831m. The counting switch 838 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a game ball passes at the tip, and the lower side of the bent passage wall 831a constituting the ball delivery space 831k and the passage partition wall 831i. The counting switch 838 is nipped and supported by sensor mounting portions 831n formed on the lower side. A wiring port 831o for passing electrical wiring to the counting switch 838 is opened near the sensor mounting portion 831n formed on the lower side of the passage partition wall 831i and below the prize ball table box 831. The wiring port 831o communicates with the above-described board mounting / accommodating space 831h.

  Further, the upper side of the prize ball table box 831, when the prize ball table box 831 is viewed from the front, the left bent passage wall 831 a of the pair of bent passage walls 831 a, the left side wall of the prize ball table box 831, A motor accommodating space 831p for accommodating the payout motor 839 is formed between them. The cylindrical main body of the dispensing motor 839 is accommodated in the motor accommodating space 831p. The payout motor 839 is fixed by being screwed to the bottom surface side of the prize ball table box 831 with a screw (not shown) by a pair of mounting pieces 839b formed on the front surface thereof. Although the prize ball motor gear 840 is fixed to the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, the payout motor 839 is fixed to the bottom surface of the prize ball table box 831 with the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. A shaft insertion hole 831q is formed in the bottom surface of the prize ball table box 831 in a shape larger than the outer shape of the prize ball motor gear 840 so that it can be attached. Note that a wiring port 831o is formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylindrical body of the payout motor 839 and above the winning ball table box 831 for passing electric wiring to the payout motor 839.

  Further, on the upper side of the prize ball table box 831, when the prize ball table box 831 is viewed from the front, the right bent path wall 831 a of the pair of bent path walls 831 a, the right side wall of the prize ball table box 831, The game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 are discharged to the ball extraction path 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and formed in the prize ball back box 832. A mechanism for operating a ball removal piece 836 for discharging a game ball passing through the bent passage 832b to a ball removal passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832 is formed. Near the bent passage wall 831a on the right side, a position defining wall extends from the bottom wall of the prize ball front box 831 to the prize ball back box 832 side from the upper wall of the prize ball front box 831 to the vicinity of the support shaft 831f described above. 831r is protrudingly provided. On the side of the position defining wall 831r closer to the right side wall of the prize ball table box 831 are a position where the prize ball removal lever 834 is not operated to be removed, and a state where the prize ball removal lever 834 is activated. Recesses 831s for defining the positions to be maintained are formed apart from each other in the vertical direction. Near the right side wall of the prize ball front box 831, a guide piece 831 t for sliding the prize ball removal lever 834 in the vertical direction protrudes from the bottom of the prize ball front box 831 toward the prize ball back box 832. Has been. A cutout portion 831u is formed on the rear upper side of the right side wall of the prize ball front box 831 for projecting an operation part 834aa of a prize ball removal lever 834 described later from the right side wall of the prize ball front box 831.

  The gear group provided in the surface area of the prize ball table box 831 includes a prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841, and a detection disk 842. As described above, the tip of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 831q formed in the bottom surface of the prize ball table box 831 and projects to the surface of the prize ball table box 831. In addition, a prize ball motor gear 840 (in this embodiment, the number of teeth Z1 = 12) is fixed. Below the prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841 (in this embodiment, the number of teeth Z2 = 60) meshing with the prize ball motor gear 840 is rotatably provided on the prize ball intermediate gear shaft 843. Below the gear 841, a detection disc 842 having a prize ball sprocket gear 844 (in this embodiment, the number of teeth Z3 = 54) meshing with the prize ball intermediate gear 841 is placed on a prize ball sprocket shaft 845 that supports the sprocket 837. It is provided rotatably. The award ball intermediate gear shaft 843 is supported by a bearing cylinder 835a that protrudes from the bottom surface of the award ball gear cover 835, which will be described later, and a bearing whose other end protrudes from the surface of the award ball table box 831. The tube 831v is supported. The prize ball sprocket shaft 845 has one end supported by a bearing cylinder 835b projecting from the bottom surface of a prize ball gear cover 835, which will be described later, and the other end projecting from the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832, which will be described later. Although it is supported by the bearing cylinder 832v, the shaft through hole 831w is formed on the lower side of the gear region (to the left of the above-described board mounting accommodation space 831h when the prize ball front box 831 is viewed from the front). And the sprocket 837 is rotatably supported in the above-described ball delivery space 831k, and the detection disk 842 is rotatably supported in the space formed by the prize ball gear cover 835 and the prize ball table box 831. Yes.

  A concave and convex joint portion 842a is formed at the center rear surface portion of the detection disk 842, and a convex and concave joint portion 837c is formed at the front end portion of the sprocket 837. The joint portion 842a and the sprocket 837 formed on the detection disk 842 As a result, the detection disk 842 and the sprocket 837 can rotate integrally around the prize-ball sprocket shaft 845. Therefore, when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 rotates, the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a rotates, and this rotation causes the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket gear 844 of the detection disk 842 to rotate. Is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 837.

  The outer circumference of the detection disk 842 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the winning ball sprocket gear 844, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the winning ball sprocket gear 844 is the same as the recesses 837a and 837b of the sprocket 837. A number of detection notches 842b are formed (three in this embodiment, three recesses 837a and three recesses 837b, six in total). This detection notch 842b is rotated by a light projecting / receiving method mounted on a baseball case inner substrate 847 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 831ha (see FIG. 53A) formed in the above-described substrate mounting receiving space 831h. This is detected by the corner switch 846. The rotation angle switch 846 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 837 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 842b detected within a predetermined time during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 846 (in many cases, the ball is smeared by the sprocket 837), the sprocket 837 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal condition (eg, ball smear). To do. The number of game balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 838 described above. The other end side of the prize ball case inner board 847 is also sandwiched by a board mounting portion 835c formed on a prize ball gear cover 835 described later.

  In the prize ball sprocket gear 844, insertion holes 844a are equally distributed every 60 and formed on the same circumference. An arc-shaped tool insertion long hole 831zz is formed in the bottom surface of the prize ball table box 831 at a position corresponding to the same circumference where the insertion holes 844a are arranged. The arcuate tool insertion slot 831zz rotates the prize ball sprocket gear 844 to check the rotation of the gear group composed of the prize ball motor gear 840, the prize ball intermediate gear 841, and the detection disk 842. In order to check the rotation of the sprocket 837, a tool such as a piano wire or a wire is inserted into the one insertion hole 844a of the prize ball sprocket gear 844 through the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz. It is. As the arc length of the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz, at least one of the insertion holes 844a of the prize ball sprocket gear 844 is rotated toward one end of the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz with a tool. Another insertion hole 844a adjacent to the insertion hole 844a appears from the other end of the arcuate tool insertion slot 831zz on the opposite side to the rotation direction and can be visually recognized.

[3-2. Prize ball back box]
Next, the configuration of the prize ball back box 832 that covers the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831 will be described. The prize ball back box 832 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose front is opened. A bent passage 832b is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 832a protruding from the bottom surface toward the prize ball front box 831 side. Of the pair of bent passage walls 832a, one bent passage wall 832a is substantially leftward from the middle of the upper part of the prize ball back box 832 to the downstream side when viewed from the front of the prize ball back box 832. The curved side wall 832a of the other side of the prize ball back box 832 is viewed from the front while the bent side wall 832a is bent and serves as the side wall of the left end side of the prize ball back box 832 from the downstream end to the downstream end. A notch 832e is formed in a portion of the prize ball back box 832 that turns substantially right from the middle of the upper side to the downstream side from the upper center, and the right end of the prize ball back box 832 extends from the middle to the downstream end. It also serves as a side wall.

  A support shaft 832f is projected from the bottom of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831 side at the upper end of the notch 832e formed in the other bent passage wall 832a. A ball punch piece 836 that can be swung by being attached is attached. As described above, the support shaft 831f protruding from the prize ball front box 831 is inserted into one end of the shaft portion 836a of the ball removal piece 836, and the other end of the shaft portion 836a of the ball removal piece 836 is By inserting the support shaft 832f protruding from the spherical back box 832, the support shafts 831f and 832f can swing. Further, as described above, the side wall portion 836b of the ball removal piece 836 is curved so that the upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a projecting from the prize ball front box 831 are flush with each other. The notch 831e is formed so as to be closed, and the upstream side and the downstream side of the side wall of the other bent passage wall 832a protruding from the prize ball back box 832 are curved so as to be flush with each other. Thus, the cutout portion 832e can be closed and formed as one smooth surface.

  Below the notch 832e formed in the other bent passage wall 832a, the prize ball back box 832 forms a pair of bent passage walls 832a that are divided from the middle to the downstream end of the prize ball back box 832. A passage partition wall 832g is formed from the bottom surface toward the prize ball front box 831 side. That is, two passages are constituted by the bent passage wall 832a and the passage partition wall 832g that are bent in the left-right direction from the middle of the prize ball back box 832, one passage constitutes the bent passage 832b, and the other passage is a ball extraction. A passage 832d is formed. The downstream side of the bent passage 832b is formed so as to constitute a ball delivery space 832k for arranging a sprocket 837 that receives a game ball passing through the bent passage 832b and sends it out to the prize ball passage 832c.

  A passage partition wall 832i is formed to project from the bottom of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831 side from the lower part of the ball delivery space 832k to the downstream end of the prize ball back box 832. That is, a path for sending out the game ball received by the concave portion 837b of the sprocket 837 along the downstream bent passage wall 832a bent to the left from the middle of the prize ball back box 832 and the middle from the middle of the prize ball back box 832 A curved passage wall 832a on the downstream side that is bent and a passage formed by a passage partition wall 832i are formed to communicate with each other, and this passage constitutes a prize ball passage 832c.

  A sprocket 837 is rotatably disposed in the ball delivery space 832k. In the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 832k, three concave portions 837b into which game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees. As described above, the sprocket 837 is also rotatably arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 arranged in front of the prize ball back box 832. In the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k, three concave portions 837a into which game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees. That is, the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are ball delivery formed in the prize ball front box 831 arranged in front of the prize ball back box 832. The sprocket 837 disposed in the space 831k is disposed behind the three concave portions 837a. Further, as described above, the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are arranged. The three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 are arranged 60 degrees apart from each other.

  On the downstream side of the prize ball passage 832c, there is a guiding protrusion 832m for guiding the game ball sent out by the sprocket 837 to a ball inlet (not shown) provided in the upper full ball path unit 850 shown in FIG. Projecting from the bottom surface of the box 832 toward the prize ball back box 832 side. A counting switch 838 for detecting a game ball guided by the guide protrusion 832m is disposed below the guide protrusion 832m. As described above, the counting switch 838 includes a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a game ball passes is formed at the tip, and one end of the counting switch 838 is a bend that forms the ball delivery space 831k. A bent passage wall 832a that is sandwiched and supported by sensor mounting portions 831n formed on the lower side of the passage wall 831a and the lower side of the passage partition wall 831i, and the other end side of the counting switch 838 constitutes the ball delivery space 832k. The sensor mounting portion 832n formed on the lower side and the lower side of the passage partition wall 832i is sandwiched and supported.

  In addition, the other end of the above-mentioned prize ball sprocket shaft 845 is inserted into the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832, and a bearing cylinder 832 v that supports the prize ball sprocket shaft 845 has a prize ball front box from the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832. Projecting toward 831.

  In addition, when the prize ball back box 832 is viewed from the front above the prize ball back box 832, the left bent path wall 832 a of the pair of bent path walls 832 a and the left side wall of the prize ball back box 832, A motor accommodating space 832p for accommodating the payout motor 839 is formed between them. The cylindrical main body of the dispensing motor 839 is accommodated in the motor accommodating space 832p. On the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832 facing the back surface of the payout motor 839 (the surface opposite to the surface on which the output shaft 839a is provided), a heat radiation port 832r for releasing heat generated from the payout motor 839 to the outside. Are perforated.

  Further, it is an upper side of the prize ball back box 832, and when the prize ball back box 832 is viewed from the front, the right bent path wall 832a of the pair of bent path walls 832a, the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832, The game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 are discharged to the ball extraction path 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and formed in the prize ball back box 832. A mechanism for operating a ball removal piece 836 for discharging a game ball passing through the bent passage 832b to a ball removal passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832 is formed. Near the bent path wall 832a on the right side, a position defining wall extends from the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832 to the prize ball front box 831 side from the upper wall of the prize ball back box 832 to the vicinity of the support shaft 832f described above. 832s is protrudingly provided. On the side of the position defining wall 832s closer to the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832 there are a position where the prize ball removal lever 834 is kept in a state where the ball removal lever 834 is not operated and a state where the prize ball removal lever 834 is operated. Recesses 832t for defining the positions to be maintained are formed apart in the vertical direction. Near the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832, a guide piece 832u for sliding the prize ball removal lever 834 in the vertical direction protrudes from the bottom of the prize ball back box 832 toward the prize ball front box 831 side. Has been. On the upper rear side of the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832, a notch 832 x for projecting an operation part 834 aa of a prize ball removal lever 834 described later from the right side wall of the prize ball back box 832 is formed.

  In addition, a pair of insertion pieces 832y are arranged on the upper end surface of the prize ball back box 832 at positions corresponding to a pair of positioning recesses (not shown) formed on the lower end surface side of the ball guiding unit 920 shown in FIG. It protrudes toward you.

  A notch portion 832z for inserting a locking convex portion (not shown) formed on the main body frame base 600 shown in FIG. 4 is formed from the center of the lower wall of the prize ball back box 832.

  Further, a tool insertion slot 832zz for inserting a tool such as a piano wire or a wire is provided on the bottom surface of the prize ball back box 832 in order to confirm the swinging condition of the ball removal piece 836. Curved and drilled along the shape of the portion 836b.

[3-3. Prize ball divider]
Next, when attaching the prize ball back box 832 to the prize ball front box 831, a game ball passing through the bent path 831 b formed in the prize ball front box 831 and a game passing through the bent path 832 b formed in the prize ball back box 832 The configuration of the prize ball middle partition plate 833 for preventing the balls from entering each other will be described. The prize ball middle partition plate 833 includes the shape of the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the prize. It is formed in a plate shape bent along the shape of the bent passage 832b formed in the spherical back box 832.

  In the state where the upper surface of the prize ball partition plate 833 is sandwiched between the prize ball front box 831 and the prize ball back box 832, the upper surface of the prize ball front box 831 and the upper surface of the prize ball back box 832 are flush with each other. Become. The game balls passing through the front and rear guide passages of the ball guide unit 920 can smoothly flow into the upper front end and the rear upper end of the award ball partition plate 833 (inflow). The inclined portions 833a are respectively arranged so that the cross-sectional area in the front-rear direction of the award ball partition plate 833 gradually increases within a predetermined distance from the upper end of the award ball partition plate 833 downward. Is formed.

  The lower surface of the prize ball inner partition plate 833 has a ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball outer box 831 in a state where the prize ball inner partition plate 833 is held between the prize ball outer box 831 and the prize ball rear box 832. Between the three recesses 837a on the front side of the sprocket 837 and the three recesses 837b on the rear side of the sprocket 837 in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 and slightly above the sprocket 837 main body. Has reached. A ball delivery space 831k in which a game ball passing through a bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831 is formed in the prize ball table box 831 is provided at the lower front end portion and the rear lower end portion of the prize ball middle partition plate 833. In order to smoothly flow into the three recesses 837a on the front side of the sprocket 837 (so that it can easily flow in), the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is the back of the prize ball From above the lower end of the award ball partition plate 833 so that it can smoothly flow into the three recesses 837b on the rear side of the sprocket 837 in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the box 832 (so that it can easily flow in). The inclined portions 833b are respectively formed so that the cross-sectional area in the front-rear direction of the prize ball middle partition plate 833 gradually increases within a predetermined distance dimension toward the front (that is, , Toward the lower end of the Shodama partition plate 833, the inclined portion 833b as the cross-sectional area in the longitudinal direction of the Shodama partition plate 833 is gradually reduced are formed).

[3-4. Prize ball release lever]
Next, the game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 are discharged to the ball extraction passage 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 The configuration of the prize ball removal lever 834 for discharging the game balls passing through to the ball extraction passage 832d formed in the prize ball back box 832 will be described. The prize ball removal lever 834 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the front-rear direction. The lever main body 834a and an elongated plate-like elastic piece 834b projecting upward from the upper surface of the lever main body 834a, and a convex part 834ba projecting leftward from the upper end of the elastic piece 834b Has been. On the upper right side of the lever main body 834a, an operation portion 834aa is provided so as to protrude rightward. A convex portion 834ab (see FIGS. 53A and 53B) that can come into contact with a reinforcing rib 836c formed on the prize ball removing lever 834 is directed to the left side below the left surface of the lever body 834a. Projecting. Slide guide grooves 834ac and 834ad are formed on the front side and the rear side of the lever main body 834a, respectively.

  In a state where the prize ball removal lever 834 is held between the prize ball table box 831 and the prize ball back box 832, the slide guide groove 834 ac formed on the front side of the lever main body 834 a projects into the prize ball table box 831. The slide guide groove 834ad formed on the rear surface of the lever main body 834a is inserted into the guide piece 832u protruding from the prize ball back box 832 and inserted into the guide piece 831t provided. The extraction lever 834 can slide up and down along the guide pieces 831t and 832u. When the operation portion 834aa of the prize ball removal lever 834 is slid up and down, a projection 834ba projecting from the elastic piece 834b is formed on the position defining wall 831r projecting from the prize ball table box 831. In the state where the lower concave portion 831s and the lower concave portion 832t formed in the position defining wall 832s projecting from the prize ball back box 832 are engaged with each other. By maintaining the state in which the convex portion 834ab provided is in contact with the reinforcing rib 836c formed on the prize ball removal lever 834, the side wall 836b of the ball removal piece 836 projects from the prize ball front box 831. A notch 831e formed on the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a and a notch 832e formed on the other bent passage wall 832a projecting from the prize ball back box 832. With conditions that can be blocked are is maintained, the right side and a state in which contact with the Shodama partition plate 833 is maintained. In such a state, the ball removal piece 836 is removed by the weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 and / or the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832. Since the support shaft 831f protruding from the prize ball front box 831 and the support shaft 832f protruding from the prize ball back box 832 cannot be swung, the ball removal piece 836 is operated to remove the ball. And the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 cannot be discharged to the ball extraction path 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the prize ball back box The game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in 832 cannot be discharged to the ball extraction passage 832d formed in the winning ball back box 832.

  On the other hand, when the operation portion 834aa of the prize ball removal lever 834 is slid up and down, the position defining wall where the projection 834ba that projects from the elastic piece 834b projects from the prize ball table box 831. In the state of engaging the upper concave portion 831s formed in the 831r and the upper concave portion 832t formed in the position defining wall 832s protruding from the prize ball back box 832, the lower left side of the lever main body 834a When the protruding portion 834ab projecting from the ball is released from the contact with the reinforcing rib 836c formed on the prize ball removal lever 834, the side wall 836b of the ball removal piece 836 is placed in the prize ball table box 831. A notch 831e formed on the side wall of the other bent passage wall 831a protruding, and a notch 832e formed on the other bent passage wall 832a protruding from the prize ball back box 832; Along with a state that can be closed respectively is released, the right side and a state in which contact with the Shodama partition plate 833 is released. In such a state, the ball removal piece 836 is removed by the weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 and / or the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832. Since the support shaft 831f and the support shaft 832f protruding from the prize ball back box 832 can be swung, the ball removal piece 836 can be operated to remove the ball. The game ball passing through the formed bent path 831b can be discharged to the ball extraction path 831d formed in the prize ball front box 831 and the game passing through the bent path 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 The ball can be discharged into the ball extraction passage 832d formed in the winning ball back box 832. The game balls discharged from the ball extraction passages 831d and 832d pass outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the ball discharge passage 865 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It is discharged and supplied to a ball lifting device installed in a pachinko island facility (not shown).

[3-5. Prize ball gear cover]
Next, a gear group (including a prize ball motor gear 840, a prize ball intermediate gear 841, and a detection disk 842) that covers the front surface of the prize ball table box 831 and is provided in the surface area of the prize ball table box 831. The configuration of the prize ball gear cover 835 for covering the prize ball will be described. The prize ball gear cover 835 is formed in a rectangular box shape having an opening at the rear, and a gear group (award for the prize ball table box 831) is arranged. Sphere motor gear 840, prize ball intermediate gear 841, and detection disk 842.) The gear partition wall 835d faces the prize ball table box 831 from the bottom of the prize ball gear cover 835 so that electric wiring is not involved. Thus, a gear protection space 835e is formed and a space other than the gear protection space 835e is formed as a wiring space 835f for routing electrical wiring. It is.

  One end of the above-described prize ball intermediate gear shaft 843 is inserted into the gear protection space 835e, and a bearing cylinder 835a that supports the prize ball intermediate gear shaft 843 is provided from the bottom surface of the prize ball gear cover 835 to the front surface of the prize ball gear cover 835. A bearing cylinder 835b is provided from the bottom of the prize ball gear cover 835 so that one end of the aforementioned prize ball sprocket shaft 845 is inserted below the bearing cylinder 835a and supports the prize ball sprocket shaft 845. Projecting toward the front surface of 835. Further, in the gear protection space 835e, a base plate 847 in a prize ball case that is held and supported by a board mounting portion 831ha (see FIG. 53A) formed in the board mounting housing space 831h of the above-mentioned prize ball table box 831. A board mounting portion 835c that sandwiches and supports the other end of the prize ball projects from the bottom surface of the prize ball gear cover 835 toward the prize ball front box 831.

  In the wiring space 835f, a prize ball table box 831 that passes through a wiring port 831o of a prize ball table box 831 that is opened near the upper side of the cylindrical main body of the payout motor 839 on the bottom upper side and the right side of the gear protection space 835e. A wiring processing piece 835g that hangs and collects electric wiring to a payout motor 839 that is fixed by screwing with a screw (not shown) to the bottom side of the ball protrudes from the bottom surface of the prize ball gear cover 835 toward the prize ball table box 831. Has been.

  In addition to the electrical wiring to the payout motor 839 collected by the wiring processing piece 835g, the electrical wiring to the counting switch attached to the back side of the prize ball front box 831 (the electrical wiring to the counting switch 838 is in the vicinity of the counting switch 838) And the board mounting / accommodating space 831h of the prize ball table box 831 can be passed through the wiring port 831o of the prize ball table box 831). The electrical wiring to the prize ball case inner board 847 accommodated in the space 831h is passed from the wiring space 835f to the outside of the gear protection space 835e (that is, the payout control shown in FIG. 4 for performing payout control of the payout device 830). The wiring notch 835h for passing the electrical wiring for electrically connecting the dispensing control board 4110 and the dispensing device 830 accommodated in the board box 950 is provided with a gear protection space. It is formed on the lower side of the right side wall of 835E.

  A through hole 831y is formed in the prize ball front box 831 at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 832w provided in a plurality of positions on the prize ball back box 832, and a mounting hole is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 831y. 835i is formed in the prize ball gear cover 835. By screwing with a screw (not shown) from the front of the prize ball gear cover 835 with the attachment holes 835i, the through holes 831y and the attachment bosses 832w being aligned, the prize ball table box 831 and the prize ball middle partition plate 833 are attached. The prize ball gear cover 835 and the prize ball back box 832 are integrally fixed in a sandwiched state.

  Further, the prize ball gear cover 835 is detachably attached to the rear surface side of an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. A plurality of hook-like engaging portions 835k for mounting are provided in a projecting manner, and when the dispensing device 830 is pressed against the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801 and slid upward, the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801 is vertically aligned. A guide protrusion 835m is provided so as to be inserted into a guide groove (not shown) to be formed. These hook-like engagement portions 835k are respectively engaged with engagement protrusions (not shown) formed on the main body frame base 600, and press the dispensing device 830 against the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801 so as to face upward. By sliding and pushing up, the hook-shaped engaging portion 835k and an engaging protrusion (not shown) are engaged with each other. A pair of insertion pieces 832y formed on the upper end surface of the prize ball back box 832 is inserted into a pair of positioning recesses (not shown) formed on the lower end surface side of the ball guiding unit 920 shown in FIG. The upper end surface of 830 comes into contact with the lower end surface of the ball guiding unit 920. At this time, the lock member 870 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Accordingly, a not-shown locking projection formed on the lock member 870 is inserted into a notch 832z formed on the lower wall of the winning ball back box 832 so that the not-shown locking projection and the notch 832z are engaged with each other. To do. Thereby, the payout device 830 can be fixed to the rear side of the payout unit base 801.

[3-6. Sprocket fixed position]
Next, the fixed position of the sprocket 837 will be described. As described above, the rotation angle of the sprocket 837 is configured such that the detection notch 842b formed on the outer periphery of the detection disk 842 can be detected by the rotation angle switch 846. Has been. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846 is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 accommodated in the payout control board box 950 shown in FIG. Based on the signal, the rotational position of the sprocket 837 can be grasped. When the rotation position of the sprocket 837 is stopped at a fixed position, the dispensing control board 4110 determines the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 in advance when the detection notch 842b is detected based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846. After being rotated by the rotation angle, the state where the drive is stopped is maintained to maintain the state where the sprocket 837 stands by at a fixed position.

  On the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, as described above, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball table box 831, three recesses 837a into which game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees and formed. In the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, three recesses 837b into which the game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees, and the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 is formed. The three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball and the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are arranged so as to be shifted from each other by 60 degrees. Yes. Each time the sprocket 837 makes one revolution, a maximum of six game balls received by the three recesses 837a and 837b can be sent downstream.

  When the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotated, the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a is rotated as described above, whereby this rotation is caused by the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket of the detection disk 842. The sprocket 837 is transmitted via the gear 844 to rotate. The payout motor 839 is a small stepping motor. When the output shaft 839a is rotated by 15 steps, the sprocket 837 is rotated by 60 degrees, whereby the game ball received in any one of the recesses 837a and 837b described above. When the output shaft 839a is rotated 90 steps, the sprocket 837 is rotated 360 degrees, that is, once, so that all the game balls received by the recesses 837a and 837b are downstream. Can be sent to the side.

  In a state where the sprocket 837 is stopped at a fixed position, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 53 (b), a game ball passing through the bent passage 831 b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is received on a certain ridgeline, and in the ball delivery space 832 k formed in the prize ball back box 832. In addition, the payout control board 4110 controls the game ball to pass through the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. Yes.

  In the present embodiment, the payout motor 839 is the same as a small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5. This small stepping motor is an extremely small motor having a cylindrical body with an outer diameter of 20 mm and a length of 18.9 mm. In the payout motor 839, which is such a small stepping motor, the static torque is extremely small. The sprocket exceeds the static torque of the payout motor 839 due to the weight of the game ball and the weight of the subsequent game ball that passes through the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 with respect to the game ball received in the recess 837b of the sprocket 837. The state in which the rotation of the 837 is stopped cannot be maintained, and the sprocket 837 may be rotated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer peripheral portion and the concave portion of the sprocket 837 shown in FIG. 53. In the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is received on the ridge line that is a boundary portion with the 837a. The sprocket 837 is set in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in the winning ball back box 832 on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837b shown in FIG. Is maintained at a fixed position, the weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is reduced by the sprocket 837. The sprocket 837 is loaded in a direction in which the sprocket 837 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side with respect to the ridge line that is a boundary portion between the peripheral portion and the concave portion 837a (clockwise in FIG. 53A). The weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b. On the other hand, when the sprocket 837 is viewed from the front side, the load can be applied in a direction in which the sprocket 837 is rotated counterclockwise (clockwise in FIG. 53B). The load due to the weight of the game ball is well balanced on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837a and on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837b. It can be given and balanced.

  Thus, even when the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor with a very small static torque, is adopted by setting the sprocket 837 at a fixed position and balancing the loads due to the weight of the game ball in a balanced manner. The sprocket 837 can be kept stopped at the fixed position. In addition, when the sprocket 837 is stopped at a fixed position, the load due to the weight of the game ball is balanced and balanced, so that at the start of driving of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor. The load on the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 can be suppressed from being significantly increased, so that step-out can be prevented and the sprocket 837 can be smoothly rotated.

  Further, as described above, the load due to the weight of the game ball on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837a and the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837b. Can be balanced and balanced, so even if an earthquake occurs after the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after the game hall is closed, The probability that the rotational position deviates from the fixed position can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the payout motor 839 is the same as the small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5. Accordingly, the distance dimension in the depth direction of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the payout device 830 can be secured large by reducing the distance dimension in the depth direction of the payout device 830, and thus corresponds to the payout device 830. A large space in the depth direction on the rear surface of the game board 5 at the position can be secured, and a large movable body device having a plurality of electrical drive sources can be arranged.

  Note that, for example, the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is received and stopped in the recess 837a of the sprocket 837, and the prize ball back box 832 is formed in the recess 837b of the sprocket 837. When the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b is not received by the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is received in the recess 837b of the sprocket 837. If it is received at the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, the weight of the subsequent game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is the axial direction of the sprocket 837, that is, the prize ball sprocket shaft that pivotally supports the sprocket 837. 845, while being applied as a load in the axial direction of 845, As a load for rotating the sprocket 837 to the game ball received in the concave portion 837a of 837, the weight of the subsequent game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831 is given, The load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ridgeline that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837a and the ridgeline that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837b. There is a disadvantage that the combined state collapses, which is not preferable as a fixed position of the sprocket 837.

[3-7. Maintenance of dispenser]
Next, the maintenance of the payout device 830 will be described. The rotation state of the gear group including the prize ball motor gear 840, the prize ball intermediate gear 841, and the detection disk 842 is confirmed, and the rotation condition of the sprocket 837 is confirmed. 54A, a tool such as a piano wire or a wire is drilled from the front side of the payout device 830 (the front side of the prize ball table box 831) into the prize ball table box 831 as shown in FIG. The arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz can be inserted into one insertion hole 844a of the winning ball sprocket gear 844 and rotated along the arc-shaped tool insertion slot 831zz. As a result, it is possible to confirm a problem in which teeth are broken and rotation is not transmitted to any of the prize ball motor gear 840, the prize ball intermediate gear 841, and the prize ball sprocket gear 844, and the bending path 831b, In the case where the game ball is not sent out from the prize ball passages 831c and 832c even though the detection ball 842 having the prize ball sprocket gear 844 is rotated by putting the game ball in 832b, the ball is formed in the detection disk 842. It can also be confirmed that a failure has occurred in the engaged state between the joint portion 842a and the joint portion 837c formed on the sprocket 837.

  Further, when confirming the swinging condition of the ball removal piece 836, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the operation portion 834aa of the prize ball removal lever 834 is slid upward to move the ball removal piece 836. After a state where the ball can swing, a tool such as a piano wire or a wire is bent from the back side of the payout device 830 (the back side of the prize ball back box 832) to the prize ball back box 832. By touching the side wall portion 836b of the ball punch piece 836 and the reinforcing rib 836c of the ball punch piece 836 through the tool insertion long hole 832zz and moving along the curved tool insertion long hole 832zz, the ball punch piece 836 is swung. Can be made. Thus, for example, it can be confirmed that the ball removal piece 836 cannot be swung or cannot be swung smoothly due to, for example, cigarette dust or dust. Such a state can be eliminated by moving a tool such as a curved tool insertion slot 832zz.

[4. Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, the configuration of the game board 5 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a front view showing a state in which the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 2 described above, and FIG. 56 is a front view showing a configuration example of the game board 5 shown in FIG.

  The game board 5 includes an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112. The game board 5 further includes a frame-shaped front component member 1110A and a plate-like game panel 1200. The front component member 1110A defines an inner periphery of a game area 1100 in which a game ball (also simply referred to as “ball”) as a game medium is launched when the player operates the handle device 500. On the other hand, the gaming panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A to be arranged as the rear end of the gaming area 1100, thereby forming the gaming area 1100.

  The game panel 1200 includes a transparent panel plate and a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown). The panel board has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A, and has an outer shape smaller than that of the front component member 1110. On the other hand, the panel holder holds the panel plate detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110A.

  The front unit in the game board 5 is provided along the lower left area of the game area 1100 and an attacker unit 2100 that is arranged at the lowermost part in the game area 1100 so as to extend right above the out mouth in the right direction when viewed from the front. A front side unit, a gate unit 2300 disposed at a position slightly above the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the left edge when viewed from the front in the gaming area 1100, and a frame-like shape disposed at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100. A center accessory 2500, a movable decorative body 3250 provided inside the center accessory 2500, and various signals such as a lighting signal, a flashing signal, and a gradation lighting signal inputted from various decorative boards described later of the game board 5 7-segment display device 18 that displays a decorative stop symbol that decoratively imitates a special symbol stop symbol to be described later using a so-called 7-segment display based on 0 and lighting and blinking while special symbols are variably displayed on the basis of various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals and gradation lighting signals inputted from various decorative boards (to be described later) of the game board 5 Repeating variable display lamps 1701, 1702, and 1703 are provided.

  Further, on the back side of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 5, a peripheral control board box that houses a peripheral control board, which will be described later, is provided.

  Further, the game board 5 has a game area 1100 roughly divided into left and right by a center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1200. The outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 Between the outer periphery of the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game region 1100 (inner periphery of the front component member 1110A). It is a wide area where game balls can be sufficiently distributed. In the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel board.

  In the game board 5, when a game ball is launched to the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is distributed by the distribution entry passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500 from the upstream side of the stop portion of the front component member 1110A. Sent to the 2530 side. Further, the game balls are distributed in either the left or right direction within the distribution space 2530 by the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 and then discharged from the discharge port. Thereafter, the game ball is guided by the guide passage 2540 and discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port opened upstream of the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. In this way, the game ball can be received through the distribution space 2530 with a high probability to the open prize opening 2103 in the open state.

  In this game board 5, when a game ball is launched to the left side of the center object 2500, the game ball is guided in the direction of the gate unit 2300 and the front side unit by a plurality of obstacle nails that are planted. When entering the warp entrance 2504, it is discharged directly above the first start opening 2101 through the stage 2510, and wins the gate section 2301, the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the starting opening 2101, 2102, and the big winning opening 2103. It is possible to enjoy the original game by the movement of the game ball.

  That is, in the route on the left side of the center accessory 2500, the player can entertain the movement of the game ball by jumping the game ball with the obstacle nail, while in the route on the right side of the center accessory 2500, The chances of contact can be reduced as much as possible to distribute the game balls in the distribution space 2530, or the game balls can be easily received by the big prize opening 2103.

  The function display unit 1180 includes a display unit 1181 which will be described later. The function display unit 1180 is provided at, for example, a lower part of the front component member 1110 as a position where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and can be viewed from the player side. Yes. The function display unit 1180 includes a game status indicator 1183, a first special symbol memory indicator 1184, a first special symbol indicator 1185, a second special symbol indicator 1186, a second special symbol memory indicator 1187, and a normal symbol memory indicator. A device 1188, a normal symbol display device 1189, and a round display device 1190 are each attached to the front surface of a function display board described later. The function display unit 1180 is provided with a connection terminal for connecting the function display board and the main control board 4100.

  In the display unit 1181 described above, a game status indicator 1183 (game status display means) including one LED for displaying the current game status, and a game ball is received by the first start port 2101. First special symbol memory display 1184 for displaying the number of holds, and the first special symbol lottery result (first special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball to the first start port 2101 A first special symbol display 1185 including one 7-segment LED for displaying as a symbol, and a second special symbol lottery result (second special lottery result) drawn by receiving a game ball at the second start port 2102 ) As a second special symbol, a second special symbol indicator 1186 including one 7-segment LED, and the number of holds regarding the reception of the game ball in the second start port 2102 A second special symbol memory indicator 1187 for Shimesuru, and a. Note that the lottery executed when a game ball is received at the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 is a precondition for executing the jackpot game unlike the general jackpot lottery. This is a lottery to determine whether or not to operate the condition device and to determine the expected value of the prize ball amount. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if such a lottery is won, the condition device only operates, and the jackpot gaming mode is not immediately started with this.

  Further, the display unit 1181 includes a normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of holdings associated with the game ball passing through the gate unit 2301, and the game ball passing through the gate unit 2301. The normal symbol display 1189 composed of one LED for displaying the result of the normal lottery drawn as a normal symbol, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit (per condition device is activated)” ”And a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103.

  The gaming state indicator 1183 described above includes color LEDs that can change the emission color, such as red, green, and orange, for example, and various gaming states can be obtained by combining the emission color and lighting or blinking. (For example, probability variation state, short time state, probability variation and short time state (probability variation state and short time state), jackpot gaming state, etc.) are displayed.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 starts the variable display when a game ball is received at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol cannot be displayed in the first special symbol display 1185 in a variable manner. Is the number of reserved (stored) numbers of the first special symbol that is held (stored). The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on.・ Displays the number of hold by blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holds is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holds is four, both the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are It is blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. The number of hold is displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The 7-segment LED stops after it fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special Let the player recognize the lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 is provided with color LEDs that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the game ball is placed on the gate portion 2301 by a combination of the emission color to be emitted and lighting or blinking. The result of the normal lottery executed in accordance with the passing is displayed. Note that the normal symbol display 1189 displays the normal symbol stop symbol in a manner corresponding to the result of the normal lottery after the normal symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time in the same manner as the special symbol.

  The normal symbol memory display 1188 is a normal symbol whose start of variable display is suspended (stored) when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2301 when the normal symbol display 1189 cannot display the normal symbol in a variable manner. Displays the number of holds (stored). The normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d having LEDs, and the normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d are sequentially turned on in accordance with the number of reserved symbols, thereby displaying the number of ordinary symbol stored symbols. To do. In the present embodiment, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 includes a 2-round display lamp, a 6-round display lamp (not shown), a 12-round display lamp (not shown), and a 16-round display lamp. Displays the number of rounds in.

[5. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, and FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal plate such as a game ball that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board, the CR unit and the frequency display board. FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 57 and the board connected thereto. 61 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration example of a sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor in which various control programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. Main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and for driving various solenoids Mainly includes a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring a sign of a predetermined power failure or an instantaneous power failure state (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”). The above-described main control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, and controls power-on processing that is performed when power is turned on.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a built-in RAM (corresponding to the “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). A watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud are also built-in. The above-described main control built-in RAM has, as part of its storage area, a jackpot determination random number storage area, a special symbol random number storage area, and a reach determination random number for each start storage information stored in a start storage information storage area described later. It has a storage area, random numbers for variation pattern 1, 2 and a random number storage area for variation type, and a starting storage information storage area and a transmission information storage area described later. Of these, the start memory information storage area includes a first start memory information storage area for the first special symbol and a second start memory information storage area for the second special symbol. In addition, the main control built-in RAM also includes a jackpot flag area capable of storing a jackpot flag value to be described later. As will be described later, the big hit flag represents not only a loss (00H) or a big hit (01H) but also a small hit (02H). Therefore, if the main control MPU 4100a accesses one storage area called the big hit flag area without accessing the small hit flag area in which the value of the big hit flag can be stored, the main control MPU 4100a only determines whether it is a big hit or lost. In addition, it is possible to grasp at the same time whether it is a small hit.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  A first start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2101, a second start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2102, and a ball that enters the general winning port 2104 A detection signal from the general prize opening switch 3020 for detecting the played game ball and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Also, a game ball is placed in the distribution detection sensor 2580, a gate switch 2301 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning port switch 3020 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning port 2201, and a big winning port 2103. The detection signal from the count switch 2110 that outputs a detection signal upon detecting acceptance, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, is a panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 5, and The signal is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and the start port solenoid 2105, the attack solenoid 2108A, the attack solenoid 2108B, and the distribution drive motor 2558 (see FIG. 5) from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d through the panel relay terminal plate 4161. (Not shown), each of which outputs a drive signal, or outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, thereby relaying the panel from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. A first special symbol indicator 1185, a second special symbol indicator 1186, a first special symbol memory indicator 1184, a second special symbol memory indicator 1187, and a normal symbol indicator via a daughter board 4161 and a function display board 1191. 1189, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190 are output drive signals.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2301, and the count switch 2110. The general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 are contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2350, so that the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, and The detection of game balls by the gate switch 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2301. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning balls 2103 are opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switches are used as the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data by the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receives various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to that effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM described above, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, and the like. Circuit connection is established via a bus 4100ah (see FIG. 60). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (FIG. 60). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea, and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is started as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. And BC0. With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 4100a stores various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in an operation signal (RAM clear) from an operation switch 952 when an operation switch 952 of a payout control board 4110 (to be described later) is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Signal) is output from the payout control board 4110 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Is erased (cleared).

[6. Dispensing control board]
Next, a payout control board 4110 for controlling payout of game balls and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 is a block diagram of the payout control board, and FIG. 64 is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor of the payout device.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the payout control board 4110, in addition to the operation switch 952 that also functions as shown in FIG. 4 and the error LED display 953 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1, A payout control unit 4110 for performing various controls. Here, the payout control unit 4110, various power supplies supplied to the payout control board 4110, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d, the excitation method of the payout motor 839, the drive voltage switching circuit to the payout motor 839, when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off The switching timing of the drive voltage to the payout motor 839 and the drive voltage to the payout motor 839 will be described.

[6-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 58, a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout is a payout control MPU 4110a that is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. 48, a payout control input circuit 4110b to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 4110c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and the payout device 830 shown in FIG. CR for exchanging various signals between a payout motor drive circuit 4110d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 839 and a CR unit (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 A unit input / output circuit 4110e. The payout control MPU 4110a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The payout control input circuit 4110b does not have a reset function because a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals is not provided. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4110b is a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset IC (hereinafter referred to as “payout control system reset IC”) that is a dedicated IC that outputs a reset signal (not shown) is not input. It is configured as. In other words, the payout control input circuit 4110b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset IC, so that the various signals based on the information are output in various ways. It is configured as a circuit output from the terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4110c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. The payout control output circuit 4110ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and the payout control output circuit 4110cb without a reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4110ca with the reset function is reset when the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate is reset by a payout control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4110cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset IC is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4110cb without the reset function is based on the information that the various signals input to the various input terminals are not reset by the payout control system reset IC. The circuit is configured to output signals from various output terminals.

  The ball break switch 821 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the two ball guide passages formed in the ball guide unit 920 shown in FIG. 4, the award of the payout device 830 shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and (b). A detection signal from the counting switch 838 for detecting a game ball flowing down in the ball passages 831c and 832c is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846 for detecting the detection notch 842b formed on the outer periphery of the detection disk 842 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. And, it is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch (not shown) for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, a detection signal from a main body frame opening switch (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b.

  Also, whether the full tank guide path formed in the lower full ball path unit 860 shown in FIG. 4 that leads to the full tank socket 528 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a full switch (not shown) for detecting whether or not is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b.

  The payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from a main control board (not shown) that controls the progress of the game housed in the main control board box provided in the game board 5 (hereinafter referred to as “main control board”). The data is received at the input terminal of the serial input port via the payout control input circuit 4110b. When the payout control MPU 4110a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board as serial data, a payout control output circuit with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to 4110ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4110ca to the main control board.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4110a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port as serial data to the payout control output circuit 4110cb without the reset function, thereby giving out the payout without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the control output circuit 4110cb to the main control board. When the main control board completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, it outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4110a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function, thereby paying out with the reset function. The drive signal is output from the control output circuit 4110ca to the payout motor drive circuit 4110d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 839, or the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Is output to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with a reset function, so that the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4110ca with a reset function to the error LED display 953. .

  The error LED display 953 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 953 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it indicates that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, the main control board and the payout) The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the control board 4110 and the control board 4110) is notified, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of the ball” (specifically, the out of ball switch) Based on the detection signal from 821, the fact that there is no game ball in the two ball guide passages formed in the ball guide unit 920 is notified, and when the number “2” is displayed, There is a certain effect (specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846, the bending passages 831b and 832b of the dispensing device 830 shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b) communicate with the ball delivery spaces 831k and 832k. Sprocket at the entrance 37 and the game ball mesh with each other in the vicinity of the entrance to notify that the sprocket 837 is difficult to rotate), and when the number “3” is displayed, it indicates that it is a “counting switch error” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the count switch 838, the count switch 838 is informed of a problem), and when the number “5” is displayed, it indicates a “retry error” (specifically, payout). Notification that the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from an unillustrated full switch) Based on the detection signal, it is informed that the inside of the full tank guide path formed in the lower full ball path unit 860 leading to the full tank reception port 528 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls), and the number “ 7 " When it is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (electrical in any one ranging from the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is a predetermined number of balls). To that effect).

  Also, the payout control MPU 4110a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to an external terminal board (not shown) that is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall via a resistor (not shown).

  Also, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board to an external terminal board (not shown) that is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall via a resistor (not shown). doing. This external terminal board is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC are built in), and installed in the game hall via these photocouplers. The number of game balls and various information (game information) are transmitted to the hall computer. The external terminal board and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to cause the hall computer to Does not malfunction or break down, and there is an abnormality in the main control board that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout etc. A voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 331 of the ball lending operation unit 330 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 333 shown in FIG. It is input to a CR unit (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial manner, and this signal is sent to the predetermined control MPU 4110a via the CR unit input / output circuit 4110e. Input to the input terminal of the input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the display unit 334 of the lending operation unit 330. This signal is input to the display unit 334. A CR unit lamp (not shown) arranged near the display unit 334 emits light when supplied with a supply voltage from the CR unit.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110, the main control board, etc. is shown as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Each capacitor is provided. With the capacitor for the payout control board 4110, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. In addition, a microprocessor (hereinafter referred to as “main control MPU”) mounted on the main control board by a capacitor for the main control board incorporates various types of information in the main control MPU even during power-off processing. Stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”). Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 4110a via the payout control input circuit 4110b when the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 4110a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 4110a. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4110cb without reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4110cb without reset function to the main control board. When the operation switch 952 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, when this operation signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main output control MPU via the payout control board 4110, the main control is performed. The MPU judges as the RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and triggered by this, the main control MPU is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM. It has become.

[6-2. Various power supplies supplied to the payout control board]
Next, various power supplies supplied to the payout control board 4110 will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

  As shown in FIG. 64, the power supply substrate 931 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 931a, a power factor correction circuit 931b, a smoothing circuit 931c, and a power supply generation circuit 931d. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the synchronous rectifier circuit 931a. The synchronous rectifier circuit 931a is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and rectifies 24 volt (AC24V) and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 931b. This power factor improvement circuit 931b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 931c. The smoothing circuit 931c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed power to the power generation circuit 931d.

  The power supply generation circuit 931d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 931c to + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created.

  Three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power source creation circuit 931d of the power board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 4110. Of these three types of voltages, two kinds of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, are The main control board provided in the game board 5 is supplied via the payout control board 4110. The three types of voltages + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power generation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 are the peripheral control boards provided in the game board 5 (the peripheral control boards are based on commands from the main control board, The progress of various effects is controlled.), And is supplied to various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side.

  + 5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is first supplied to the payout control filter circuit 951a, and noise is removed. The +5 V from which noise has been removed is supplied to a capacitor for a payout control board 4110 (not shown) provided in the power supply board 931 via a diode (not shown) provided in the payout control board 4110, as well as a payout control MPU 4110a and a payout motor drive circuit. Also supplied to 4110d and the like. In addition to being supplied to the payout control input circuit 4110b, + 12V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is also supplied to the payout motor drive circuit 4110d and the like, and is provided in the game board 5 via the payout control board 4110. It is supplied to the control board. The main control board provided in the game board 5 includes a + 5V creation circuit (not shown). In this + 5V creation circuit, a +12 to + 5V power source supplied via the payout control board 4110 is created to create a main control filter (not shown). Supply to the circuit. In this main control filter circuit, noise is removed from + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit. The +5 V from which the noise has been removed is supplied to a main control MPU and the like in addition to a main control board capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 via a diode (not shown) provided on the main control board.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the payout control board 4110 and the main control board provided in the game board 5 are each supplied with + 5V power, but the payout control board 4110 has a power supply for the power supply board 931. While + 5V created by the creation circuit 931d is supplied to the payout control MPU 4110a, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d, etc. via the payout control filter circuit 951a, the main control board provided in the game board 5 has + 5V (not shown). In the creation circuit, a power source of + 12V to + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931 is created, and + 5V created on the main control board provided in the game board 5 is supplied to the main control MPU through the main control filter circuit. It has become a power system that is.

[6-3. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 48 will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4110da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4110da are created by a + 12V power line supplied with + 12V DC power created by the power creation circuit 931d of the power board 931 and a power creation circuit 931d of the power board 931. A + 5V DC power supply line to which + 5V DC power is supplied via the payout control filter circuit 951a is electrically connected, and + 12V and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da is grounded to the ground (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 4110da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, through the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 839. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4110da, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor driving voltage, and the third terminal which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 through the Zener diode PZD60 The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal and supplied to the payout motor 839. A detailed description will be given later of the point of performing control to switch between + 12V being supplied to the dispensing motor 839 as the motor driving voltage and + 5V being supplied to the dispensing motor 839 as the motor driving voltage.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. If the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 839. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4110ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 839, and rotate the dispensing motor 839. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD60 is electrically connected to the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal before the drive ICPIC 60 as a protection. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[6-4. Discharge motor excitation method]
Next, the excitation method of the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the payout motor 839 is the same as the small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5. This small stepping motor is an extremely small motor having a cylindrical body with an outer diameter of 20 mm and a length of 18.9 mm. In the payout motor 839, which is such a small stepping motor, when the control is performed by the one-phase excitation method that can excite the coils of the small stepping motor one by one, the generated torque becomes extremely small. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the driving motor and the stationary torque are generated in the dispensing motor 839, the control of the two-phase excitation method that can excite the coil of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, two phases at a time. It was adopted. In this two-phase excitation method, the coil of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, can be excited two phases at a time, so that the coil of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, is excited one phase at a time. Compared with the system, about twice the torque can be obtained.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, is performed by the two-phase excitation method, thereby contributing to increasing the driving torque and the stationary torque. ing.

[6-5. Switching circuit for drive voltage to dispensing motor]
Next, a motor drive voltage switching circuit of the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the payout motor 839 is the same as the small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5. This small stepping motor is an extremely small motor having a cylindrical body with an outer diameter of 20 mm and a length of 18.9 mm. In the payout motor 839 which is such a small stepping motor, no voltage is applied to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 839 in a non-excited state. In, the output shaft 839a can be rotated with extremely small torque (the output shaft 839a can be rotated each time the phase is rotated from one phase to the next phase).

  As described above, the prize ball motor gear 840 is fixed to the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, and the rotation of the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a causes the rotation of the prize ball intermediate gear 841. Then, the sprocket 837 is transmitted to rotate via the prize ball sprocket gear 844 of the detection disk 842. That is, when the dispensing motor 839 is in a non-excited state, a very small torque is obtained when no voltage is applied to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 839 and no current flows. Thus, the output shaft 839a can be rotated. For this reason, for example, the weights of a plurality of game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 are loaded into the recesses 837a formed in the sprocket 837, and this load rotates the sprocket 837. The torque acts to generate torque, and the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 is rotated by this torque. In order to prevent this, each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase) of the payout motor 839 is obtained in order to obtain the static torque of the payout motor 839 even when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is not rotated. , / A phase), it is necessary to apply a voltage to flow current.

  In order to obtain the static torque of the payout motor 839, it is necessary to always apply a motor drive voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, B phase and A phase) to maintain a current flowing state. Although the output shaft 839a of the motor 839 is not rotated (in other words, the player does not pay out the game ball as a prize ball), the output shaft of the payout motor 839 Power is consumed in the same manner as when the 839a is rotated.

  For this reason, if the motor driving voltage is always low (for example, +5 V), the power consumption can be suppressed. However, in this case, the driving torque of the payout motor 839 is reduced. When the weights of the plurality of game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the load are applied to the recess 837a formed in the sprocket 837, the load acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket 837, and the torque generated thereby Since the driving torque of the payout motor 839 is lost, there is a problem that the sprocket 837 cannot be rotated and the payout motor 839 steps out. On the other hand, if the motor driving voltage is always high (for example, +12 V), the driving torque of the payout motor 839 increases, so that the above-described step-out does not occur (that is, in the above example). Even if this load acts on the concave portion 837a formed in the sprocket 837, the weight of the plurality of game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket 837. Because the driving torque of the payout motor 839 is superior to the torque generated thereby, the rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor can be transmitted to the sprocket 837 to smoothly rotate the sprocket 837. There is a problem that consumption cannot be suppressed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor drive circuit 4110d in the payout control board 4110 is provided with the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain drive torque for paying out the game ball. The payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby controlling the supply of + 12V to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage. In order to obtain a static torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a stopped, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. Control to supply + 5V to the dispensing motor 839 as the drive voltage It has become the jar.

  As a result, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stopped, + 5V, which is extremely smaller than + 12V, is supplied to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage. Thus, it is possible to contribute to suppression of power consumption in a state where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. Further, since the heat generation of the payout motor 839 can be suppressed to a small level, it is possible to contribute to preventing the temperature rise in the pachinko island facility.

[6-6. Driving voltage to dispensing motor when power is turned on and off]
Next, the drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off will be described. As described above, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 rotates the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball. HI) and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for controlling to supply + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, while maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stopped. In the case of obtaining torque, control is performed to supply + 5V as a motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 by setting the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. .

  The payout control MPU 4110a is used when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (in addition to when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the power is restored after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted by a power failure, The power-on process, which is a payout control program, is also included in the power recovery to the machine 1 after the power supply to the machine 1 is interrupted by a power failure that occurs instantaneously. When the power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4110a first sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) to supply + 5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, and sets the voltage switching circuit 4110da. To generate a static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. This is because when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, + 5V as the motor drive voltage is not forcibly supplied to the payout motor 839, but + 12V as the motor drive voltage is supplied to the payout motor 839. This is because the electric power consumed by is extremely large. In other words, in the main control board provided in the game board 5 supplied with the + 12V DC power generated by the power generation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931, + 5V, which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU from this + 12V, is the + 5V generation circuit. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, in a state where + 12V is supplied to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage, the power level consumed by the payout motor 839 becomes extremely large, so that the voltage level of + 12V Accordingly, it becomes difficult for the main control board provided in the game board 5 to create + 5V, which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU, from the + 12V by the + 5V creating circuit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU from being unable to start operation. To have.

  In addition, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the voltage may be unstable. Therefore, the power is turned on by supplying + 5V, which is set as a low motor driving voltage, to the payout motor 839. Even if + 5V becomes unstable at this time, the maximum allowable voltage that can be applied to the dispensing motor 839 is not exceeded. In other words, the mechanism is such that failure of the dispensing motor 839 due to an unstable power source when the power is turned on can be prevented.

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a performs an initial setting process for the drive ICPIC 60. In the initial setting process for the drive ICPIC 60, the initial value of the drive ICPIC 60 is set. As this initial value, information for outputting a payout motor drive signal for applying a motor drive voltage to a predetermined phase (for example, B phase and A phase) in order to obtain a static torque of the payout motor 839. Is set in the internal register of the output port built in the payout control MPU 4110a.

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a performs a fixed position setting process of the sprocket 837 after performing a wait timer process of waiting until a predetermined time elapses until the power source becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the fixed position setting process of the sprocket 837, it is determined whether or not the sprocket 837 is positioned at the above-described fixed position. Specifically, the payout control MPU 4110a is not in the state where the sprocket 837 is located at the above-described fixed position when the detection notch 842b is not detected based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846. In order to switch the motor drive voltage from +5 V to +12 V, the logic of the voltage switch signal (for example, LOW to HI) is set and output to the voltage switch circuit 4110da. Then, the payout control MPU 4110a sets information for outputting a payout motor drive signal to rotate the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 in an internal register of an output port built in the payout control MPU 4110a. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 rotates in accordance with the payout motor drive signal output from the output port. When the payout control MPU 4110a detects the detection cutout 842b, the payout control MPU 4110a rotates the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 by a predetermined rotation angle, and then sends a payout motor drive signal to stop the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. Information to be output is set in an internal register of an output port built in the payout control MPU 4110a. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stops according to the payout motor drive signal output from this output port. Then, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI to LOW) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to switch the motor driving voltage from + 12V to + 5V. Maintain the standby state. Then, the payout control MPU 4110a performs payout control main processing every 2 ms (processing for receiving and analyzing commands from the main control board provided in the game board 5, processing for setting main operations related to payout of the game ball, error LED display The process of creating display data to 953 is repeated. The payout control MPU 4110a determines that the sprocket 837 is in the above-described fixed position when the detection notch 842b is detected based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846. The fixed position setting process of the sprocket 837 is terminated as it is, and the payout control main process is repeated every 2 ms.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off (including when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the power is cut off due to a power failure or momentary power interruption), the payout control MPU 4110a is repeated every 2 ms. The payout control main process to be performed shifts to a payout control power-off process. In this payout control power-off process, various information relating to payout is stored in the payout control built-in RAM as backup information, and in order to forcibly supply + 5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, the logic ( For example, it is set to LOW) and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and control is performed to generate a static torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stopped. As described above, + 5V is also supplied to the payout control MPU 4110a in addition to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, the drive system called the payout motor 839 and the control called the payout control MPU4110a are used. The system is that the system goes down at the same time. This is because when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, + 5V as the motor drive voltage is not forcibly supplied to the payout motor 839, and + 12V as the motor drive voltage is supplied to the payout motor 839. This is because the electric power consumed by is extremely large. In other words, in the main control board provided in the game board 5 supplied with the + 12V DC power generated by the power generation circuit 931d of the power supply board 931, + 5V, which is the operation control voltage of the main control MPU from this + 12V, is the + 5V generation circuit. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, in the state where + 12V is supplied to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage, the power level consumed by the payout motor 839 becomes extremely large, so that the voltage level of + 12V As a result, the main control MPU operates before the main control power-off process, which is one process of the main control program, completes the storage of various information about the game in the main control built-in RAM. A mechanism that can prevent the control voltage level from rapidly decreasing and the main control MPU from becoming inoperable. It has become.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 forcibly supplies + 5V to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. By outputting the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off for the control system called the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 and the drive system called the payout motor 839. By supplying the same + 5V (that is, for the control system called the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110, + 5V which is the operation control voltage is supplied, and for the drive system called the payout motor 839) By supplying + 5V as the motor drive voltage), the dispensing control board 4 And when the 10 control system that payout control MPU4110a of stops operating, a drive system that payout motor 839 is adapted to be able to match, and when to stop operating. Thereby, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be cut off while the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 grasps the rotational position of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. That is, the payout motor 839 can be kept under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 until immediately before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 from rotating under the influence of the power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[6-7. Switching timing of drive voltage to dispensing motor]
Next, the switching timing of the motor drive voltage of the payout motor 839 of the payout device 830 will be described. As described above, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 rotates the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball. HI) and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for controlling to supply + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, while maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stopped. In the case of obtaining torque, control is performed to supply + 5V as a motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839 by setting the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputting it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. .

  When the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotated, the prize ball motor gear 840 fixed to the output shaft 839a is rotated as described above, whereby this rotation is caused by the prize ball intermediate gear 841 and the prize ball sprocket of the detection disk 842. The sprocket 837 is transmitted via the gear 844 to rotate. On the outer periphery of the sprocket 837, as described above, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball table box 831, three recesses 837a into which game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees and formed. In the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, three recesses 837b into which the game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees, and the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 is formed. The three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball and the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are arranged so as to be shifted from each other by 60 degrees. Yes. Each time the sprocket 837 makes one revolution, a maximum of six game balls received by the three recesses 837a and 837b can be sent downstream.

  The game balls received in the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball box 831 are sent to the prize ball passage 831c and detected by the counting switch 838 as described above. Is done. The game balls received in the three recesses 837b of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 are sent to the prize ball passage 832c and detected by the counting switch 838 as described above. Is done.

  The payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby controlling the supply of + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839, thereby outputting the payout motor 839. In the case where the game ball is paid out by rotating the shaft 839a by rotating the sprocket 837, and when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to sprocket 837. After the game balls received in the recesses 837a and 837b are finally sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c, until the game balls sent out last are detected by the counting switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. Time required (preset time, for example, The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 continues to be rotated until this time elapses, and when this time has elapsed, the rotation drive of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped and the payout motor 839 is stopped. In order to stop the output shaft 839a and switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, to switch from HI to LOW) using this as an opportunity, the logic (for example, LOW) of this voltage switching signal is set to set the voltage By controlling to supply + 5V as a motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 by outputting to the switching circuit 4110da, a static torque is generated in the payout motor 839, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is maintained stopped. doing.

  Specifically, for example, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 shown in FIG. 7, the game ball is shown in FIG. 7 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 by the ball launching device 680 shown in FIG. 7. Into the game area 5a of the game board 5 shown in FIG. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . When a game ball is received at the start winning port as a winning port, a command (prize ball command) for paying out only three game balls as a winning ball to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 is provided in the game board 5. Is transmitted from a main control board (not shown) for controlling the payout to the payout control board 4110. The payout control board 4110 of the payout control board 4110 sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switch signal and outputs it to the voltage switch circuit 4110da, thereby performing control to supply + 12V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage. The sprocket 837 is rotated by driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to rotate the first game ball, the second game ball, and finally the third game ball one by one. After the game balls received in 837a and 837b are sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c, it is necessary until the third game ball sent out last is detected by the counting switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. Until the time elapses (the preset time is set to several hundred milliseconds, for example). The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 continues to be driven to rotate, and when this time elapses, the rotation drive of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. In order to switch the logic of the switching signal (for example, to switch from HI to LOW), the logic (for example, LOW) of this voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, so that + 5V is set as the motor driving voltage. By controlling the supply to the payout motor 839, a static torque is generated in the payout motor 839, and the state where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped is maintained.

  Further, as described above, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 detects the detection notch 842b based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846 when stopping the rotation position of the sprocket 837 at a fixed position. After the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle, the state where the drive is stopped is maintained to maintain the sprocket 837 in a standby state. In other words, when the payout control MPU 4110a stops the rotation position of the sprocket 837 at a fixed position, when the detection cutout 842b is detected based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 846, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is set in advance. The "predetermined rotation angle" is set to the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, so that the motor driving voltage is + 12V. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is driven to rotate and the sprocket 837 is rotated to pay out the game ball, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped. When rotating the sprocket 837, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven. After the game balls received in 837a and 837b are finally sent out to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c, the time required for the game balls sent out last to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 continues to rotate until a predetermined time (for example, set to several hundred milliseconds) elapses, and when this time elapses, the payout motor This corresponds to the rotation angle at which the sprocket 837 is rotated until the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped after the rotation drive of the output shaft 839a of 839 is stopped.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout control board box 950 in FIG. 4 performs payout control by rotation of the output shaft of the payout motor 839 in FIG. 48, which is a small motor for paying out game balls. Is provided with a payout control board 4110 accommodated therein. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a voltage switching circuit 4110da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d in FIG. 64 and a power supply board 931 housed in the power supply board box 930 in FIG. The voltage switching circuit 4110da is in a state where + 12V as a driving voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, are stopped. It can be switched between +5 V as a stop voltage, which is a voltage for maintaining and lower than the drive voltage. The power supply substrate 931 can create + 12V as a driving voltage and + 5V as a stopping voltage.

  The payout control board 4110 can operate by supplying + 5V as a stop voltage as an operation control voltage. The payout control board 4110 provides a drive voltage of + 12V as a small motor when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball. A voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for supply to the motor 839, while a static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped is obtained. In this case, a voltage switching signal as a control signal can be output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply + 5V as a stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. The payout control board 4110 can output a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to forcibly supply + 5V as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839 when the power is cut off.

  Specifically, when the output torque 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 receives the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI ) And output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for controlling to supply + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the dispensing motor 839, while maintaining the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 stopped. Is obtained, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby supplying + 5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839. It comes to perform control. The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 is driven by a motor when the power is cut off (including when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, as well as when the power is cut off due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure). In order to forcibly supply + 5V as a voltage to the dispensing motor 839, the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839 is stopped. Control for generating a static torque for maintaining the above is performed.

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, the driving voltage is supplied to the dispensing motor 839, which is a small motor, by supplying + 12V as a driving voltage. A driving torque for paying out the game ball can be obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is the motor of the motor, and + 5V is supplied as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. Thus, it is possible to obtain a static torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor.

  By the way, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, when the control system called the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 is brought into a state of being previously stopped with respect to the drive system called the payout motor 839, the payout motor 839 is turned off. There is a possibility that the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 may rotate due to the absence of the control by the payout control MPU 4110a. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 forcibly supplies + 5V to the payout motor 839 as a stop voltage as a motor drive voltage. By outputting the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off for the control system called the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 and the drive system called the payout motor 839. When the same + 5V is supplied at the time (that is, for the control system called the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110, + 5V which is the operation control voltage is supplied and to the drive system called the payout motor 839) + 5V is supplied as a stop voltage as the motor drive voltage. It By), the control system of the payout control MPU4110a payout control board 4110 when to stop operating, a drive system that payout motor 839 is adapted to be able to match, and when to stop operating. Thereby, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be cut off while the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 grasps the rotational position of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. That is, the payout motor 839 can be kept under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 4110 until immediately before the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 from rotating under the influence of the power-off of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a movable body that reciprocates between a standby position and an operating position is operated by a motor (for example, JP 2010-119670 A).

  By the way, in recent gaming machines, a plurality of movable bodies are provided in the game board, and each movable body is operated to provide a player with powerful effects by the movable bodies. For this reason, in recent gaming machines, it is necessary to provide a plurality of motors for operating each movable body in the game board. Costs are reduced by unifying the same type of stepping motors.

  In addition to the game board, a payout motor is provided in a payout device for paying out game balls, for example. The payout motor is configured such that the rotation of its output shaft is transmitted as a prize ball to a sprocket that pays out the game ball to the player, and is controlled by a payout control board (payout control means).

  If a small stepping motor is used as the payout motor, the output shaft of the small stepping motor can be rotated with an extremely small torque when no voltage is applied to the small stepping motor. The output shaft of the small stepping motor is rotated by the load on the sprocket due to the dead weight of the motor. In order to prevent this, even when the output shaft of the small stepping motor is not rotated, in order to obtain the static torque of the small stepping motor, it is necessary to apply a voltage to the small stepping motor to pass a current. is there.

  However, if the voltage applied to the small stepping motor is low, power consumption can be suppressed. However, this reduces the driving torque of the small stepping motor, which reduces the driving force of the game ball to the sprocket. Since the load acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket and the driving torque of the small stepping motor is lost to the torque generated by this, the sprocket cannot be rotated. On the other hand, it is applied to the small stepping motor. If the voltage is high, the driving torque of the small payout motor will increase, so even if the load on the sprocket due to the weight of the game ball acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket, the small stepping motor will generate the torque generated by this. Because the driving torque of Although it is possible to rotate the sprocket by transmitting the rotation of the output shaft of the stepping motor to the sprocket, this makes it impossible to suppress power consumption, and it is extremely difficult to adopt a small stepping motor as the dispensing motor. there were.

  Therefore, the present embodiment has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to adopt a small stepping motor as a payout motor.

  Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout control is performed by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 839 in FIG. 48 which is a small stepping motor for paying out the game ball. The payout control board 4110 accommodated in the payout control board box 950 of 4 is provided. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a voltage switching circuit 4110da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d of FIG. The voltage switching circuit 4110da stops + 12V as a driving voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor. It is a voltage for maintaining the state, and can be switched between +5 V as a stop voltage that is lower than the drive voltage.

  The payout control board 4110 provides a driving voltage of + 12V as a driving voltage when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, is rotationally driven to obtain driving torque. A voltage switching signal as a control signal is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply to a certain dispensing motor 839, and control by a two-phase excitation method for exciting a coil of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, two phases at a time. On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor, the + 5V as the stop voltage is supplied to the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor. In order to supply the voltage switching circuit 4110da, the voltage switch which is a control signal Outputs a signal, and performs the control by 2-phase excitation method for exciting the coil of the dispensing motor 839 is a small stepping motor by two phases.

  Specifically, when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain driving torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal. By outputting to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, the control of supplying + 12V as the motor driving voltage to the dispensing motor 839 is performed, and the control by the two-phase excitation method for exciting the coil of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, two phases at a time. On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 stopped, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switch signal to set the voltage switch circuit 4110da. When the control for supplying + 5V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 is performed Moni, and performs the control by 2-phase excitation mode to excite the coil of the dispensing motor 839 is a small stepping motor by two phases.

  As described above, by supplying +12 V as a driving voltage to the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. A driving torque for paying out the game ball can be obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor, and + 5V is used as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor. By supplying, a static torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, can be obtained. Then, by supplying + 12V as a driving voltage to a payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor, a driving torque for paying out a game ball by rotating the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor is provided. In the case of obtaining the stationary torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor is stopped by supplying + 5V as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor. Even in the case of obtaining a small stepping motor, for example, by controlling the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, by a two-phase excitation method in which the coils of the dispensing motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, are excited two phases at a time. Of the dispensing motor 839 Compared with one-phase excitation mode that excites the Le one phase, since it is possible to increase the torque payout motor 839 is a small stepping motor generates, it is possible to increase the driving torque and the static torque.

  As a result, it is possible to contribute to increasing the driving torque by controlling the payout motor 839, which is a small stepping motor, by the two-phase excitation method. For example, the prize ball shown in FIG. When the weights of the plurality of game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the front box 831 are loaded into the recess 837a formed in the sprocket 837, the sprocket 837 is rotated by the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839. Even if the rotational direction is opposite to the rotational direction to be driven, the driving torque of the payout motor 839 is superior to the torque generated thereby. Therefore, the rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor is transmitted to the sprocket 837 so that the sprocket 837 is It can be rotated smoothly. Further, by controlling the payout motor 839 which is a small stepping motor by the two-phase excitation method, it is possible to contribute to increasing the static torque. For example, the prize ball table shown in FIG. Even if this load is applied to the recess 837a formed in the sprocket 837 due to the weight of a plurality of game balls passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the box 831, this load is generated even if it works in the direction of rotating the sprocket 837. Since the static torque of the payout motor 839 is greater than the torque to be released, the state where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor is stopped can be maintained, and the state where the sprocket 837 is stopped can be maintained. Therefore, a small stepping motor can be adopted as the payout motor 839. Further, by adopting the same type as the small stepping motor that operates the movable body provided in the game board 5 as the payout motor 839, it is possible to contribute to reducing the cost of the gaming machine.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a movable body that reciprocates between a standby position and an operating position is operated by a motor (for example, JP 2010-119670 A).

  By the way, in recent gaming machines, a plurality of movable bodies are provided in the game board, and each movable body is operated to provide a player with powerful effects by the movable bodies. For this reason, in a recent gaming machine, it is necessary to provide a plurality of motors for operating each movable body in the game board, and a small motor is adopted so that the distance dimension in the depth direction of the game board is not increased. Costs are reduced by unifying the motors into the same type.

  In addition to the game board, a payout motor is provided in a payout device for paying out game balls, for example. The payout motor is configured such that the rotation of its output shaft is transmitted as a prize ball to a sprocket that pays out the game ball to the player, and is controlled by a payout control board (payout control means).

  When a small motor is used as the payout motor, the output shaft of the small motor can be rotated with extremely small torque when no voltage is applied to the small motor. The output shaft of the small motor is rotated by the load on the sprocket. In order to prevent this, even when the output shaft of the small motor is not rotated, in order to obtain the static torque of the small motor, it is necessary to apply a voltage to the small motor to cause a current to flow.

  However, if the voltage applied to the small motor is low, power consumption can be suppressed. However, this reduces the driving torque of the small motor, which reduces the load on the sprocket due to the weight of the game ball. It works in the direction of rotating the sprocket, and the driving torque of the small motor is lost to the torque generated by this, so the sprocket cannot be rotated. On the other hand, the voltage applied to the small motor is high. As a result, the driving torque of the small payout motor increases, so that even if the load on the sprocket due to the weight of the game ball acts in the direction of rotating the sprocket, the driving torque of the small motor is superior to the torque generated by this. For this reason, the rotation of the output shaft of a small motor is transmitted to the sprocket. Although it is possible to rotate, which in becomes impossible to suppress the power consumption, it is extremely difficult to adopt a small motor as payout motor.

  Therefore, the present embodiment has been made in view of such circumstances, and the object is to adopt a small motor as a payout motor.

  Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, payout control is performed by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 839 in FIG. 48, which is a small motor for paying out game balls. The payout control board 4110 accommodated in the payout control board box 950 is provided. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a counting switch 838 in FIG. 48 and a voltage switching circuit 4110da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d in FIG. The counting switch 838 can detect a game ball paid out by rotating the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor. The voltage switching circuit 4110da is in a state where + 12V as a driving voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, are stopped. It can be switched between +5 V as a stop voltage, which is a voltage for maintaining and lower than the drive voltage.

  The payout control board 4110 provides a drive voltage of + 12V as a small motor when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball. A voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for supply to the motor 839, while a static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped is obtained. In this case, a voltage switching signal as a control signal is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply + 5V as a stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor.

  Specifically, when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain driving torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal. In the case of obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped while controlling to supply + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 by outputting to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. The payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby controlling the supply of + 5V to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage.

  Also, the payout control board 4110 outputs a control signal to the voltage switching circuit 4110da and supplies + 12V as a driving voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor to output the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. When the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is rotationally driven. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, continues to rotate until the time required for the game ball to be finally paid out to be detected by the counting switch 838 elapses. Then, a control signal is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to change the driving voltage from + 12V to the stopping voltage. Switch to Bruno + 5V and supplies to the dispensing motor 839 is a small motor.

  Specifically, the payout control MPU 4110a performs control to supply + 12V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage by setting the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switch signal and outputting it to the voltage switch circuit 4110da. When the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is driven to rotate and the sprocket 837 is rotated to pay out the game ball, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotated. After driving and finally sending out the game balls received in the recesses 837a and 837b of the sprocket 837 to the prize ball passages 831c and 832c (for example, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 shown in FIG. Depending on the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 by the ball launcher 680 shown The game ball is struck by strength into the game area 5a of the game board 5 shown in Fig. 7. Then, when the game ball struck into the game area 5a is received in a winning opening (not shown), it is received. In accordance with the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830. When a game ball is received at the start winning opening as a winning opening, only 3 gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. A command (prize ball command) for paying out to the upper plate 201 is transmitted to a payout control board 4110 from a main control board (not shown) that controls the progress of the game provided in the game board 5 by 830. Payout control of the payout control board 4110. The MPU 4110a sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby supplying + 12V as the motor driving voltage to the dispensing motor 839. To rotate and drive the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 to rotate the sprocket 837, so that the first game ball, the second game ball, and finally the third game ball one by one After the game balls received in the recesses 837a and 837b of the sprocket 837 are sent out to the award ball passages 831c and 832c), the last game ball sent out (in the above example, when only 3 game balls are paid out as the prize balls) The time required for the last game ball sent out to be detected by the counting switch 838 through the prize ball passages 831c and 832c (the third game ball) is a preset time, for example, The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is continuously rotated until the time elapses, and when this time elapses, the output of the payout motor 839 is output. In order to stop the rotational drive of the shaft 839a and stop the output shaft 839a of the dispensing motor 839, and to switch the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, to switch from HI to LOW), this voltage switching signal The logic (for example, LOW) is set and output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da to control supply of + 5V to the payout motor 839 as a motor drive voltage, thereby generating a static torque in the payout motor 839 and the payout motor. The state where the output shaft 839a of 839 is stopped is maintained.

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, the driving voltage is supplied to the dispensing motor 839, which is a small motor, by supplying + 12V as a driving voltage. A driving torque for paying out the game ball can be obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is the motor of the motor, and + 5V is supplied as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. Thus, it is possible to obtain a static torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. Then, a control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, and + 12V is supplied as a driving voltage to the dispensing motor 839, which is a small motor, so as to be a small motor. When the output shaft 839a of 839 is driven to rotate to pay out the game ball, and when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped, the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor. The output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, continues to be rotationally driven until the time required until the game ball that has been finally paid out is detected by the counting switch 838 is rotated. In response to this, a control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. As the dynamic voltage from + 12V to switch to + 5V as a stop voltage and supplies to the dispensing motor 839 is a small motor. Therefore, a small motor can be adopted as the payout motor 839. Further, by adopting the same type as the small motor that operates the movable body provided in the game board 5 as the payout motor 839, it is possible to contribute to reducing the cost of the gaming machine.

  More specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, payout control is performed by rotating the output shaft of the payout motor 839 in FIG. 48, which is a small motor for paying out game balls. The payout control board 4110 accommodated in the payout control board box 950 of FIG. 4 is provided. The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a voltage switching circuit 4110da in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d of FIG. This voltage switching circuit 4110da has + 12V as a driving voltage for rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, and the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, being stopped. Can be switched between +5 V as a stop voltage, which is a voltage for maintaining the voltage and is lower than the drive voltage.

  The payout control board 4110 provides a drive voltage of + 12V as a small motor when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor is rotationally driven to obtain a driving torque for paying out the game ball. A voltage switching signal, which is a control signal, is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da for supply to the motor 839, while a static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped is obtained. In this case, a voltage switching signal as a control signal is output to the voltage switching circuit 4110da in order to supply + 5V as a stopping voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor.

  Specifically, when the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is rotationally driven to obtain driving torque for paying out the game ball, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switching signal. In the case of obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 is stopped while controlling to supply + 12V as the motor drive voltage to the payout motor 839 by outputting to the voltage switching circuit 4110da. The payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic (for example, LOW) of the voltage switching signal and outputs it to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, thereby controlling the supply of + 5V to the payout motor 839 as the motor drive voltage.

  Thus, based on the control signal (specifically, the logic of the voltage switching signal) input to the voltage switching circuit 4110da, the driving voltage is supplied to the dispensing motor 839, which is a small motor, by supplying + 12V as a driving voltage. A driving torque for paying out the game ball can be obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is the motor of the motor, and + 5V is supplied as a stop voltage to the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. Thus, it is possible to obtain a static torque for maintaining the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839 which is a small motor. Therefore, a small motor can be adopted as the payout motor 839. Further, by adopting the same type as the small motor that operates the movable body provided in the game board 5 as the payout motor 839, it is possible to contribute to reducing the cost of the gaming machine.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a movable body that reciprocates between a standby position and an operating position is operated by a motor (for example, JP 2010-119670 A).

  By the way, in recent gaming machines, a plurality of movable bodies are provided in the game board, and each movable body is operated to provide a player with powerful effects by the movable bodies. For this reason, in a recent gaming machine, it is necessary to provide a plurality of motors for operating each movable body in the game board, and a small motor is adopted so that the distance dimension in the depth direction of the game board is not increased. Costs are reduced by unifying the motors into the same type.

  In addition to the game board, a payout motor is provided in a payout device for paying out game balls, for example. The payout motor is configured such that the rotation of its output shaft is transmitted as a prize ball to a sprocket that pays out the game ball to the player, and is controlled by a payout control board (payout control means). In a state where the sprocket is controlled to stop rotating by the payout control board (payout control means), the game ball received by the sprocket is connected to the succeeding game ball so that a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the sprocket. Will be maintained.

  However, if a small motor is adopted as the payout motor, the static torque of the small motor is extremely small, so even if the control for stopping the rotation of the sprocket is performed by the payout control board (payout control means) When the load on the sprocket due to the weight of the ball exceeds the static torque of the small motor, the sprocket may rotate due to the load due to the weight of the game ball. For this reason, in gaming machines, it has been necessary to employ a large motor with a large static torque as a payout motor, and it has been extremely difficult to employ a small motor.

  Therefore, the present embodiment has been made in view of such circumstances, and the object is to adopt a small motor as a payout motor.

  More specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout control board box 950 in FIG. 4 that performs payout control of the payout device 830 in FIG. A payout control board 4110 is provided. The payout device 830 includes a bent passage 831b that forms a spherical passage by a pair of bent passage walls 831a in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b) as a spherical passage formed in the front, and a spherical passage formed in the rear. 52 (a) and 52 (b), a pair of bent passage walls 832a are formed into two lanes which can pay out game balls passing through the bent passage 832b constituting the ball passage.

  The payout device 830 includes at least a payout motor 839 in FIG. 48 and a sprocket 837 in FIG. 48 which are small motors. The payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is an electrical drive source, and the sprocket 837 can rotate by transmitting the rotation of the output shaft 839a of the payout motor 839, which is a small motor.

  One sprocket ball 837 receives a game ball passing through a bent passage 831b constituting a spherical passage by a pair of bent passage walls 831a in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b) as a spherical passage formed forward. A certain number of front recesses are provided, and a game ball passes through a bent passage 832b constituting a ball passage by a pair of bent passage walls 832a in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b) as a ball passage formed at the rear. A certain number of rear recesses that can receive one ball are provided.

  Specifically, a sprocket 837 is rotatably disposed in a ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831. In the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 831k, three concave portions 837a into which game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees. Also, a ball delivery space 832k is formed in the prize ball back box 832 that covers the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. In this ball delivery space 832k, a sprocket 837 is rotatably arranged. In the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837, in the ball delivery space 832k, three concave portions 837b into which game balls are fitted are equally divided every 120 degrees. That is, the three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 are the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 covering the rear surface of the prize ball front box 831. The sprocket 837 disposed at the front is disposed in front of the three recesses 837b. Further, three recesses 837a of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831 and three of the sprocket 837 arranged in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 The recesses 837b are arranged 60 ° apart from each other.

  In a state where the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped and controlled by the payout control board 4110, a spherical path formed forward is formed on a ridge line that is a boundary portion between the sprocket 837 and the front recess. ) And (b), by setting the state in which the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b constituting the ball passage is received by the pair of bent passage walls 831a, the weight of the game ball is loaded on the sprocket 837 in one rotational direction. The spherical passage is constituted by the pair of bent passage walls 832a shown in FIGS. 52A and 52B as the spherical passage formed on the ridge line that is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the rear concave portion. By setting the state in which the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b is received, the weight of the game ball is caused by the sprocket 837 to have a direction opposite to the one rotation direction. That is adapted to be loaded into the other direction of rotation.

  Specifically, in a state where the sprocket 837 is stopped at a fixed position, in the ball delivery space 831k formed in the prize ball front box 831, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837a. 53B in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832 while the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is received on the ridge line that is a boundary portion with FIG. As shown in b), the payout control board is in a state of receiving the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in the winning ball back box 832 on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837b. 4110 is controlled. As a result, the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball table box 831 is received on the ridge line which is the boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837a shown in FIG. 53 (a). At the same time, in the ball delivery space 832k formed in the prize ball back box 832, the ball is formed in the prize ball back box 832 on the ridge line, which is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b, as shown in FIG. When the sprocket 837 is maintained at a fixed position by receiving the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b, the weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage 831b formed in the prize ball front box 831 is reduced. As seen from the front side of the payout device 830, the sprocket 837 is rotated clockwise on the ridge line that is the boundary between the outer peripheral portion of the 837 and the recessed portion 837a. While the load can be applied in the rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 53A), the weight of the game ball passing through the bent passage 832b formed in the prize ball back box 832 is reduced. A direction in which the sprocket 837 is rotated counterclockwise with respect to the ridge line that is a boundary portion between the outer peripheral portion of the sprocket 837 and the concave portion 837b as viewed from the front side of the dispensing device 830 (clockwise in FIG. 53B). Direction).

  In this manner, when the payout motor 839, which is a small motor, is stopped and controlled by the payout control board 4110, it is formed forward on a ridge line that is a boundary portion between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837a as the front recess. 51 (a) and 51 (b) as a ball path to be played, the game ball passing through the bent path 831b constituting the ball path is received and the weight of the game ball is reduced to the sprocket 837. 1 in the direction of rotation (the direction in which the dispensing device 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front side) and rearward on the ridge line that is the boundary between the outer periphery of the sprocket 837 and the recess 837b as the rear recess. 52 (a) and 52 (b) as a spherical passage formed in the bent passage 8b constituting the spherical passage. When the game ball passing through 2b is received, the weight of the game ball is opposite to one direction of rotation of the sprocket 837 (the direction in which the payout device 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side). The load is applied in the rotational direction (the direction in which the dispensing device 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front side). As a result, the sprocket 837 is loaded in one rotational direction (a direction in which the dispensing device 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side) due to the weight of the game ball, and one rotational direction (the dispensing device 830 is By being loaded in another direction of rotation opposite to the direction of rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side (direction in which the dispensing device 830 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front side), Since the rotations in the rotation direction can be canceled each other, even if a small motor having a very small static torque compared to the static torque of a large motor is adopted as the dispensing motor 839, the dispensing control In a state where the payout motor 839 is controlled to be stopped by the substrate 4110, the state where the sprocket 837 is stopped can be maintained. Therefore, a small motor can be adopted as the payout motor 839. Further, as the payout motor 839, it is possible to contribute to reducing the cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by adopting the same type as a small motor that operates the movable body provided in the game board 5.

  In the embodiment described above, the payout motor which is a small motor (small stepping motor) is controlled by the payout control MPU 4110a by controlling the voltage switching circuit 4110a and the drive ICPIC 60 provided in the payout motor drive circuit 4110d shown in FIG. Although control for generating the drive torque and static torque of 839 was performed, such a circuit and control are also applied to a small stepping motor provided for operating various movable bodies of the game board 5. Can do.

[7. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 60, the peripheral control board 4140 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, while the peripheral control unit 4150 performs detection control of the touch state of the touch panel 246, and the game board side liquid crystal. While performing drawing control of the display device 1900 and the upper side liquid crystal display device 244, sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. And a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) that holds the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 on which the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source is mounted, calendar information that specifies the date, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second. ) The control unit 4165, the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4, and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. It includes a et flowing music and sound effects and the like volume control volume 4140a adjusted by the knob portion of the rotating operation volume (first volume control means), a. The peripheral control unit 4150 and the liquid crystal / sound control unit 4160 may be separate from each other as illustrated, or may be integrated. In this case, the processing performed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 can be performed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 with the built-in sound source VDP 4160a or vice versa.

[7-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 60, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data; Various information inherited across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time the V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for the purpose) and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). The stored contents are retained for about 50 hours. Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 851, when the game board 5 is detached from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d Loses its contents because it can no longer hold.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer is tie-mapped, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer tie-maps). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decoration board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. Transmission from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the power of the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 or the like. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, frame The signal is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the serial transmission circuit on the game board via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial Is. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae and peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads / writes data from / to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the input / output devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d. The peripheral control I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer is tie-mapped, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer tie-maps). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral count CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count and is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, or an upper decoration in the door frame 5 The lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280 is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 and the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 Music and sound effects are played from the provided speakers. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents related to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen spread on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the game state is likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player). ) Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and notification sound are used for volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on any at all, and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) is controlled by a program from the mute level to the maximum volume level. To adjust to your. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Accordingly, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker provided in the frame 5 is reduced, the sound volume is increased when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is cheating (this embodiment) Then, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or the game state may be shifted to an advantageous game state. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b includes various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, various schedule data, and predetermined individual information (hereinafter, “ (Referred to as “regulated individual information”) (effect control storage unit). The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects out of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b is one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The date / time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date / time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM which is built in the RTC control unit 4165 and receives power backup even in the event of a power failure Then, the acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. If December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of 75%, the brightness setting is set so that the brightness is further increased by 10%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to 75%, to 85%. Based on the luminance adjustment information included in the information, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted to light up.

[7-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 61, a peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup for storing, in a dedicated manner, information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc that store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for storing a copy of the various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b, etc. Various control data copy area 4150ce for storing the copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing the information not updated for backup among the various information updated by executing various control programs And a work area 4150cf.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the supply of power is started by the power source of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (at the time of power-on), the main control board 4100 (power-on) The power-on command (see FIG. 69) output by the command output means instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, in FIG. 57 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Instructing the start of production when the indicated operation switch 952 is operated In is) sometimes cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The following 0 means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the built-in sound source VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the camera can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is stored. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is a storage area to be set. The lighting data, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT for output is set, and the reception command storage area 4150cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 and sets the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 41654a RTC described later). The storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various information acquired from the storage RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 4150cae is based on a command received from the main control board 4100 (the main control MPU 4100a) and corresponds to the received command. This is a storage area in which schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  In Bank 0 (1 ms), frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and history information A storage area 4150caj and the like are provided. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is set with door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is a game board for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 This is a storage area in which the side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. In the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, various information obtained by acquiring the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5 is set. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is a rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. And the like (for example, rotation history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400, and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405) Etc.) is a storage area to be set. On the other hand, the history information storage area 4150 caj has an operation history storage area in addition to a display history storage area described later. In this operation history storage area, information related to “specified handwriting” is stored in advance as an example of a specified contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (effect control storage means). The information on the prescribed handwriting includes, for example, information on at least one of a change in thickness and a change in drawing speed due to increase or decrease in writing pressure during drawing, which is a straight line or a curve.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the Bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match, Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a power-on command (see FIG. 69) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure). Instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 952 shown in FIG. 57 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following 0 means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

[7-2. Liquid crystal and sound control unit]
The drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the sound housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the music and sound effects flowing from the speakers provided in the door frame 5. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs control incorporates a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and A sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a that performs drawing control of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, a display area (first display region) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 Various character data (or sprite data with sprite numbers) as display contents displayed in the display area (second display area) ) Or a sound ROM 4160b (production control storage means) for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmission.

  Further, in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b, as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image to be described later, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), display of an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data used for the display, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for displaying the main body frame rear surface image data used for displaying the main body frame rear surface image 740C in which the position of each part on the rear surface of the main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player, the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for display, break timer setting screen display Break timer setting screen image data are, and, rest the screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b is not limited to the suggested display object image data used for displaying the suggested display object described later for prompting the user to operate the display button displayed in the display area of the upper liquid crystal display device 470. Contact prompting display object data used for displaying a touch prompting display to be described later to be displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 470 in order to prompt the user to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is stored (data storage). means).

  Furthermore, the display size of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b is changed to the display area (first display area) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area (second display area) of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Thus, size-converted image data used to display each common image is stored in advance (effect control storage means).

  In the peripheral control unit 4150, the peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. To 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After the output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the next screen data following the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is triggered when a V blank signal described later is input, Extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

[7-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
The sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) includes a built-in RAM capable of temporarily storing data in addition to the above-described built-in sound source. As a part of such a built-in RAM, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a includes a material image RAM that can temporarily store material image data such as sprite data and repeatedly overwrite a large number of material image data.

  Furthermore, when the screen data included in the schedule data for screen generation is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as part of such a built-in RAM, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a is shown in FIG. 62 based on the input screen data. As described above, game board side character data and upper plate side character data are extracted from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b, respectively, and game board side sprite data and upper plate side sprite data (hereinafter, simply referred to as “sprite data”) are created. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated respectively for display on the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is stored, and one screen (one frame) is further used for video processing. A VRAM for storing the drawing data (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRA”). It described as ".). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM (frame buffer) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By outputting image data for the liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are synchronized. Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (one frame). ) On the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper plate side liquid crystal The image data for the display device 244 is transferred from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side. And outputs it to the crystal display device 244. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. This is the data to generate above. In the following description, the extraction of character data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b (reading) to create sprite data is also abbreviated as “reading sprite data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b”.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 244, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In this embodiment, a so-called double buffer method is adopted.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and the output used according to the output channel number The channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 Incorporates a sub-volume value that adjusts. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is adjusted by shifting to a setting mode described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified effect sound to obtain audio data as audio data. The data is output to the data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined performance sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4. The volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 is set to an allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The set volume of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is combined with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually applied to the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4. It amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speakers and the speakers provided in the door frame 5, serializes the amplified effect sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Adjust the sound data of the notification sound built into the track to be used and the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used. The volume of the notification sound thus synthesized is actually combined with the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value. It amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified notification sound to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data. Output.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the injustice to the pachinko gaming machine 1 A brief explanation of the control for playing a notification sound in order to notify the store clerk of the action, etc. First, the sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value where the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and this combination The volume of the produced sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually determined from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Amplified to a master volume value as a sound volume, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound in serialized audio data transmission IC4160c as audio data.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, but the production sound is the sound generation schedule described above. Progressing according to data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After a lapse of time, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far has been adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. It is set again as a value (at this time, if it is adjusted by moving to the setting mode by operating the display button, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound) and provided in the main body frame 4 The speaker is accommodated in the speaker box 920 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5.

  As described above, when the production sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 When a notification sound flows to notify a store clerk or the like of an illegal act, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4. Although the silenced effect sound flows from the speaker, it proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data, and therefore the speaker and door accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 after a predetermined period of time has passed. When the speaker provided in the frame 5 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound starts to flow, but starts to flow. So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

[7-2b. Liquid crystal and sound ROM]
As shown in FIG. 62, the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The upper plate character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as left and right difference type serial data, for example, a positive signal of left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 60, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured with an RTC 4165a as the center. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (timekeeping storage unit) that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source (second power source) for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a updates and holds calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b. The battery 4165b supplies power (second power) triggered by the reception of a power failure warning signal described later, separately from the main power supply (first power supply) that supplies power (first power). The supply of power (second power) may be stopped when the supply of power by the main power supply is started. In such a power supply form, the RTC 4165a is connected to the main power supply or the battery 4165b. Is supplied with power.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The production based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25, a screen on which a Christmas tree or a reindeer appears is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. For example, a screen for executing a countdown to reach the game can be unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment. The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 has a peripheral from the time point (first time point) when the peripheral control board 4140 receives a power failure detection signal output as a power failure notice from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Information related to the time until the control board 4140 receives the power-on command output from the main control board 4100 (second time point), that is, the power failure time is stored.

  On the other hand, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. ing. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, is included.

  In addition, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information are first stored as information on the date, time, and hour / minute / second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the ON / OFF switching of the backlight or the ON when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to be only.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date information is entered on the production line as the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type, etc. In addition, it stores and holds information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set to the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Accordingly, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated to shift to the setting mode and adjust the luminance of the backlight to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing a setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be set to a desired value. It can be adjusted to brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is installed. The luminance reduction accompanying the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the date. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to the luminance setting information. And when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has been powered on for the first time, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 0b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information that is set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[7-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is used to rotate the knob portion to adjust the volume of music, sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. To adjust. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (sound source built-in VDP 4160a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and door frame 5 provided in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 are provided. Music and sound effects are played from the speakers.

  In this way, music or sound is received from the speaker (sound output unit) accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker (sound output unit) provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob unit. Sound effects are flowing. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the occurrence of malfunctions of pachinko gaming machines 1 and fraudulent acts against pachinko gaming machines 1 to hall clerk, Announce the contents related to the game effect (for example, it is highly likely that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or the game state is likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player. Notification sound also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and notification sound are operated by rotating the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the sound volume, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is controlled by a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160 with built-in sound source). ) Control to be adjusted.

  The volume adjusted by this program (corresponding to an effect control program to be described later) is different from the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages, and smoothly from mute to maximum volume as shown in FIGS. 79 to 84 described later. It can be changed and set. Thus, for example, when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, a speaker (sound output unit) accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker (sound output unit) provided in the door frame 5 is reduced, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating Regardless of the turning operation of the knob portion, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, for example, a maximum volume set in software) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be rendered more powerful and advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, for example, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400, for example. Or operating the pressing operation unit 405 to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing a setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value. Then, the value of the substrate volume is increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. There are two methods: adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation to adjust the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The volume of music and sound effects is adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. If the volume of the hall clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a state in which no game is played in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, and when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeatedly demonstrated (for example, 10 times). ) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who sits down and plays a game can increase the sound volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, or sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays a game. When the player who has played the game feels loud and adjusts the volume, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game this time It is possible to reduce the sound volume to a desired level by operating 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[7-5. Touch panel module and its peripheral part]
FIG. 65 shows an example of signal exchange between the touch panel module 246a and its peripheral part.
In addition to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470, a touch panel 246 described later is connected to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives a detection signal corresponding to the contact state of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 and receives the detection signal, the peripheral control board 4140 grasps the contact state of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 according to the contact information based on the detection signal. be able to.

  The touch panel module 246a (control means) is connected to the peripheral control board 4140 connected to the main control board 4100, and controls the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). The touch panel module 246a includes a touch sensor 482 and a touch panel controller 481 having the following control register 481a. That is, the control register 481a can store a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance threshold value when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state (determination threshold storage unit).

  The touch sensor 482 detects the capacitance change at any position on the contact surface, and measures the capacitance before and after the change, while representing the coordinates of the position and the electrostatic capacitance. A detection signal is output as a signal representing the capacity (contact detection means). When the touch panel controller 481 receives this detection signal, the touch panel controller 481 acquires a coordinate value (hereinafter referred to as “detection coordinate value”) representing the position or the range thereof, while a capacitance (hereinafter referred to as “detection capacitance”) indicated by the detection signal. It is determined whether or not “capacity” is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a. As a result of such comparison, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the touch surface controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in a non-contact state, while the detected capacitance is When it determines with it being more than the threshold value for contact determination, it determines that a contact surface is in a contact state (contact state determination means).

  When the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in a contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including detection coordinate values on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives this contact detection information, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  By the way, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, generally, adjustment of sensitivity is performed as an initial process when the power is turned on, and thereafter, there are many devices that operate with the sensitivity (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-192783, the following) "First reference"). Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial process in this way, depending on the gaming environment thereafter, it may be considered that the sensitivity gradually becomes inappropriate at first glance. Here, for example, a capacitance type touch panel is superior in durability to a low dura film type touch panel, but the peak point of change in capacitance is recognized as a touch point. In addition, it is necessary to adjust the contact sensitivity that changes in response to environmental changes to be uniform and constant.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the touch panel module 246a receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the outside (for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140), the touch sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is adjusted. To do. That is, in the touch panel module 246a, when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the touch panel module 246a updates the touch determination threshold stored in the control register 481a based on the threshold setting command, thereby touching the touch panel. The contact sensitivity by H.246 is adjusted. Specifically, touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command, acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from touch panel sensor 482, and uses this capacitance as the contact surface of touch panel 246. Is determined as a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  After that, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new threshold value for contact determination updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the contact surface is determined to be in a non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch determination threshold value for determining the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is updated at a desired timing triggered by the touch panel controller 481 receiving a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) from the outside. Therefore, if the output timing of the threshold setting command is appropriately controlled, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing (calibration). Therefore, if the threshold setting command arrives at an output timing that may affect the game by the player, the touch state on the touch panel 246 is always detected appropriately without affecting the game. It can be an operating mode.

  The timing at which the touch panel controller 481 should receive the threshold setting command is, for example, that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the change display of the special symbol has ended, and the player has stopped playing the game. The timing with low possibility that it is contacting the operation surface of the touch panel 246 can be illustrated. That is, such contact sensitivity adjustment is performed as much as possible during the special symbol variation display that may be performed using the touch panel 246, and is performed when the variation display is completed. Yes.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is a capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 that can store a large number of game balls and easily generate static electricity. Sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing accordingly, and it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such changes in the surrounding environment and not by the player's operation. It becomes difficult to do.

[8. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 69 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 69 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[8-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning port switch 3020, the first starting port switch 3022, the second starting port switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When inputted, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor 839 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to store the upper plate 301 or When the lower plate 302 is electrically connected to a device for paying out a game ball as a rental ball (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. In addition, commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated. In the command 11H, two prize balls are designated, and in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 839 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that pays out game balls directly to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as balls for lending) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 68 (b), paying out from the main control board 4100 Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to the control board 4110, one prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... In 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 839 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 68C, and the self-check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[8-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. As shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general diagram synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display, test related, and others. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, statuses (1) (8 bits) have a storage capacity and indicate the type of command. (STTS value) and a mode (MODE value) having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and showing variations in performance.

  For these status (STTS value) and mode (MODE value), values of a plurality of transmission information storage areas (hereinafter also referred to as “RWM”) secured in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM are used. That is, among the 8 bits of each command, for example, the upper 3 bits use the value of the first transmission information storage area (RWM1), while the lower 5 bits use the value of the second transmission information storage area (RWM2). In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the command can be disassembled bit by bit to grasp the status and mode.

[8-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect is based on the detection signal from the first starter switch 3022 shown in FIG. 57. As shown in FIG. 69, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command is a command for instructing the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is used for designating off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. Command. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is a command for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the change state designation command is a command for instructing a transition to at least one of the probability and the short time state.

  As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 tuning effect starts. The synchronized production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interruption process described later (command transmission means).

[8-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 57, and, as shown in FIG. 69, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1186 is composed of commands with names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation starts, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 69, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a winning prize opening 1 open Nth display, a winning prize 1 closing display, a winning prize 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for the winning prize opening 1 is started during the opening of the winning prize opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the opening of the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100). The Nth round opening is instructed, and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command is the start of closing the big winning opening 1 between rounds (between the rounds of the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100) The command indicating that the winning prize 1 is counted is displayed on the winning prize opening 2103 detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 57. The number of game balls entered), and the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending A shall, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening or releasing the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2110 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the count switch 2110 detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2100). The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (when the closing of the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is started). The winning opening 1 count display command is used when the winning opening 1 is opened and when the count of the winning opening 1 is changed (when the winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball has entered the winning opening 2103 is counted. The jackpot ending command is sent to the jackpot ending when it is detected by the switch 2110) Is sent to the big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 69, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the respective state effects (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. Is).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later Is executed, and a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2301 shown in FIG. 57. As shown in FIG. 69, the normal symbol display of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The command 1189 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to a pair of movable pieces 2105 that are opened and closed by driving of the start opening solenoid 2105. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named ending per usual figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command is a normal power open start (a pair of movable pieces 2105 are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2105 is driven by the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 70, the notification display section includes commands having the names of winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the ball enters the big winning port 2103 other than during the big hit (when the condition device is operating). When the ball is detected by the count switch 2110), the start of a prize abnormality notification is instructed. The connection abnormality display command is, for example, instructing the start of connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The display command is, for example, when the electrical connection between the main control board 4100 and the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, or the like is disconnected or short-circuited. The start of abnormality display is instructed, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is an instruction to start the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024.

  The door frame opening command is generated when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 4110. In some cases, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In this case, the end of door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is a state in which the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110. In some cases, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command is issued when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. In some cases, an instruction to end the body frame release notification is given.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. The command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door frame opening command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The door frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 70, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned “7 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 70, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 70, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command is a command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 and instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140. Examples of such test commands include various substrates such as the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive substrate 4170, the motor drive substrate 4180, and the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 shown in FIG. List the commands that perform the inspection.

  In this main control board 4100, test command ports are assigned one by one for the convenience of the hardware, so that it is difficult to manage on the hardware side. Ports that can be managed by a software timer are assigned to a predetermined port among a plurality of ports, while those that can be managed by a flag are assigned to specific ports.

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later And the test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interruption process.

[8-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 70, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and A command with a name of special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect is included. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 3022. , And the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2102 based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 2109, respectively, A command for instructing a state transition from a shortened operating state to a variable shortening non-operating state, and a high-probability end designation command is performed from a high-probability state (corresponding to a probability variation state described later) to a low-probability state (such as a normal gaming state described later). The special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol storage command) is a special symbol 1 hold 0-4 pieces (free play to the first starting port 2101). The ball enters and the first special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191 informs the number of balls not yet used for the special symbol variable display (the number of holdings), and the special symbol 2 storage command (special The special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 special symbols 2 (game balls have entered the second start port 2102 and the second special symbol indicator 1186 of the function display board 1191 is still used for the special symbol variation display. The normal symbol storage command is 0 to 4 normal symbols 1 held (the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 and the normal symbol display 1189 on the function display board 1191). The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command (preceding judgment instruction command) indicates that the special symbol 1 hold is a function display base. The first special symbol display 1185 of No. 1191 is pre-read before being used to display the variation of the special symbol, and the pre-reading effect start is started to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1185 based on the special symbol 1 hold. The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command (preceding determination instruction command) is used before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191. The pre-reading effect is instructed to pre-read and notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold. In the present embodiment, these special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect commands and special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect commands are also collectively referred to as “memory pre-reading effect commands”.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 3022, When a game ball enters the second start port 2102 based on a detection signal from the start port switch 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The change reduction operation end designation command is transmitted from the speaker provided in the door frame 5 shown mainly for voice notification, and the change shortening operation end designation command is issued at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after digesting the specified number of change reductions. High probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after digesting the high probability count in the case of “High probability N times” (after the stoppage stop period has elapsed). The special symbol 1 memory command is displayed when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the first start port 2101 and the special symbol 1118 of the function display board 1191 displays the variation of the special symbol. In the state where there is a reserve number that is not yet used, when the game ball enters the first start port 2101 and the reserve number increases, the special symbol display 1185 displays the special symbol from the hold number. The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of reserved balls is changed (when the number of reserved balls is decreased for use in the variable display), and when the number of special symbol 2 actuated balls is changed (the game ball enters the second start port 2102 and displays the function) In the state where there is a reserve number that is not yet used for the special symbol variation display on the second special symbol indicator 1186 of the substrate 1191, when the game ball enters the second start port 2102 and the reserve number increases. , Its hold count And the second special symbol display 1186 is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol and the number of retained symbols is reduced), and the normal symbol storage command is used when the number of ordinary symbols 1 actuated retained ball changes (the gate unit 2350 is used). In the state where the game ball passes and the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 has a reserve number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display, the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 and the reserve number increases. The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is sent to the special symbol 1 action preserving ball. When the number increases (when the game ball enters the first start port 2101 and the number of holds increases), the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the number of special symbols 2 action hold balls increases (second start) When the game ball enters the mouth 2102 and the holding number increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 3022, Mainly from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 when a game ball enters the second start port 2102 based on a detection signal from the switch 2109 Although it is transmitted to notify that effect by voice, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 60 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to monitor the presence / absence of fraud in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. It is a thing of the specification to use also for. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 There is also a specification that does not notify by voice.

[8-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 71, each command from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) is provided with a rounded ball, counting switch error and retry error. In the rounded ball, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2). Value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) in the case of a retry error. Here, the “counting switch error” indicates whether or not a malfunction of the counting switch 838 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, the frame state is changed, and the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[9. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 72, and FIG. 74 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, and a big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit judgment random number A random number for determining an initial value for determination, a random number for determination of reach for use in determining whether or not a reach (reach out of reach) is generated when a big hit gaming state is not generated, a first special symbol display 1185 and a second The random display pattern random number used for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the special symbol display 1186, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display when the big hit gaming state is generated. The jackpot symbol used in determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the device 1186, and the jackpot symbol used for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol The initial value determination random number or the like are prepared for pattern. Note that the random number for the big hit symbol described above is used for determining the small hit symbol that is derived and displayed by the first special symbol indicator 1185 and the second special symbol indicator 1186 when the small hit gaming state is generated. It is also used as a random number. On the other hand, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number described above is also used as a small hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the small hit symbol random number. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol for use in determining whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 and an initial value for the random number for determining per normal symbol are used. Random numbers for determining an initial value for determining normal symbols, and random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbols variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 are prepared.

  For example, the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is configured by hardware built in the chip, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 0 as the minimum value). Is updated within the value 32767) as the maximum value, and the range from this minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 every time a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) toward the big hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the big hit is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining the big hit. On the other hand, the random numbers for normal symbol determination and the initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol determination described above are also updated by the same method as the method for updating the jackpot determination random number described above.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is counted up, the initial value for determining the big hit determination is determined in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number. The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a numerical value is the main control side power-off process (at power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the stored checksum value (sum value), the big hit determination initial value determination disturbance Is an initial value at which the main control MPU 4100a always derives the same fixed value from the fixed value range of the counter that extracts the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM and updates the jackpot determination random number based on the extracted ID code. A derivation process is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set to the initial value determining random number for determining the big hit is derived using the ID code, and the ID that is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM and the first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the code is stored Thus, the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from a nonvolatile RAM built in main control MPU 4100a and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for jackpot determination. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is assigned a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU provided in another game board. That is, in other game boards, the timing at which the counter value for updating the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards, that is, other pachinko gaming machines. Even if a momentary power failure occurs at every interval and a game winning ball is entered at the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 at every predetermined interval, a big hit gaming state cannot be generated. .

[9-2. Operation of counter with initial value update type]
In the initial value update type counter, when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM, and based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value as the first cycle. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number as the initial value determination random number for the big hit determination The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number updates a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a value 0 as a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as a big hit determination value range (big hit determination range), a value 10 to a value 209 are set for a low probability, and a value 10 to a value 339 are set for a high probability. That is, with a low probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are jackpots is 200, and with a high probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are jackpots is 330. Here, in this embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random number values acquired at the same time is the 200, except when the acquisition times of random number values are different. Other than that, for example, a prime number. In other words, in this embodiment, if the acquisition time of the random number value is different from the big hit determination random number (for example, the value of the random number for determining the big hit game mode acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 2575 described later) The number of random numbers that are jackpots can be made non-prime. In the present embodiment, the small hits described above are, for example, big hit determination random numbers corresponding to the number (50) of the number of big hit symbols (200) with low probability divided by four.

  Considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the minimum and maximum values are the same regardless of whether the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is low probability or high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384). In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the time when it becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of the former period being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). And the range from the value after this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter Compared with the range, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low. Then, for example, the game ball is obtained by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 with radio waves. When a fraudulent act pretending to have entered the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot determination value ranges (jackpot determination range). It can be said that there is a high probability that

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is from an intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either the low probability or the high probability. If it is set to the range close to the maximum value side, the initial value update type counter value immediately before the value that becomes the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value becomes zero. A period extending to the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and a period extending from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) And the former period is much more likely to be drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). Of these values, one of the values becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process, and is set in the above-described big hit determination initial value determination random number. Counting up, and then counting up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter Then, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value. Is set to a range close to the initial value update type counter value from the timing when the value becomes 0, the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (low value) The period extending to the time when the probability becomes 32667 and the value 31767) with high probability is irregular and rich in randomness. Thereby, for example, the game ball is obtained by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 with radio waves. Even if an illegal act pretending to have entered the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is within the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) It can be said that the probability of any value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. Until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle from the minimum value (first value) of the range from the initial value to the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the fourth cycle from time T1 is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . In this way, in the initial value update type counter, fluctuation is given to the time when the counter to be updated becomes the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity) The player is not perceived by the player).

[10. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control program described above performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. Do. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e shown in FIG. 25 (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. In step S11, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S12), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-described D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input after the power is turned on in step S14 until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes, the main control program applies power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Is input. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program makes a state in which RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 17 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 being operated to the main control MPU 4100a. Depending on whether or not it is done. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, and the operation switch 952 operates On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction to perform the RAM clear is made and it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 952 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. (Game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer processing 2, the system shown in FIG. 19 for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 is activated ( Waiting to boot). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), which will be described later, as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the power is restored ( Step S32). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value 0, and the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, “recovery” means not only the state where the power is turned off but also the state where the power is turned on, the state where the power is restored after a power outage or a momentary power failure, and the detection that a high frequency has been applied. It also includes the state of returning after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is deleted, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 indicates RAM clear and when the game information is erased, the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When the process is not completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and the big hit determination random number is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the big hit determination initial value determining random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determining random number.

  Subsequent to step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In the RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 35 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM is cleared and initial setting is performed is created. Test commands classified into test relations shown in FIG. 36 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch) is displayed. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the error sharing navigation command for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above, based on the concept of time sharing, based on the concept of time sharing. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 952 (error release unit) that should have been originally used to release an error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time from the power-on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this order in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S50). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S50, the process returns again to step S46, and the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, and this power failure warning notification. If there is no signal input, non-winning random number update processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. Note that the processing in steps S46 to S50 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program includes the start-port solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, and the upper special symbol storage display shown in FIG. The drive signal output to 1184, the lower special symbol memory display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value.

  Subsequent to step S56, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[11. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 4100, under the control of the main control MPU 4100a, the main control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. (Step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program, for example, detects each of the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. 2103, a detection signal from the count switch 2110 that detects the game ball that has entered the ball, a detection signal from the first start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2101, and the second start port 2102 A detection signal from the second starter switch 2109 for detecting the game ball that has been balled, a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, and a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet. The payout control board 4110 informs that the payout control board 4110 has normally received a detection signal from the player and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. Reading 払主 ACK signal from the control board 4110, respectively, it is stored in the input information storage area as the input information. Also, a detection signal from the first start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2101, and a detection from the second start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2102 When each signal is read, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 36 corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port switch 3022, a corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second start port switch 2109. The start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 for detecting the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2103. , A detection signal from the first start port 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2101, a second start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2102 , And the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 are first read as a first time when this switch input process is started, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning award port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the first start port switch 3022, the second start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by reading twice, a total of two times of reading, which is compared twice for the first to third times, and twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time. Since false detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general prize opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the first starting port switch 3022, the second starting port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are displayed. Reliability can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) are issued control board 4110. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the signal is normally received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Counts up.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value updating type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value as the minimum value). 0 to the maximum value is updated within the value 32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up within the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by the winning random number update processing. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the big hit determination random number. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In this embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are processed on the main control side power-on processing (main control) shown in FIG. Update processing in step S50 in the main main processing) and the winning random number update processing in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, are updated each time the interrupt timer is generated. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated after the process time becomes uneven. , The big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number in step S50 Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program creates the prize ball command shown in FIG. 66 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on this input information, The self-check command shown in FIG. 66 for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. The main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main payout serial data.

  Further, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes a prize ball control program code that is a part of the program code, and is output from the count switch 2110 when the game ball is received in the big prize opening 2103, for example. Triggered by the fact that the detection information based on the detected signal has been written in the corresponding defined bit areas defined successively one bit at a time for the number of winning prize openings 2103, for example, 15 balls as prize balls A prize ball command is generated as a prize ball instruction to pay out and is sent to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  In the present embodiment, since there are two large winning openings 2103 as the large winning openings, the main control program has a plurality of definition bit areas prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the above-described definition bit areas. From the inside, two definition bits for the special winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, these will be referred to as “first bit area” and “second bit area” in this order. For example, in the case of a game board having one winning prize slot, one definition bit area is used. These definition bit areas to be used are, for example, one bit and are adjacent to each other. When the game ball is received in the big winning opening 2103, for example, “1” is written in the first definition bit area which is the fourth bit, for example, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the big winning opening that has identified that the game ball has been received by writing, for example, “0”, and prepares for the next game ball to be received.

  Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit area is to be checked. For example, if the main control program sets the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the big prize opening 2103 to the fourth bit, the pachinko gaming machine in which only one big prize opening is provided as in this embodiment. In this case, the main control program acquires information on the fourth bit definition bit area.

  Further, the main control program performs a mask process on the detection information acquired in this way in accordance with the winning ball effective range of the special winning opening 2102 described later, creates a winning ball command, and writes it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not to output to the payout control board 4110. When it is determined that this prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program, for example, as a mask process for each defined bit area in which detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is written is forcibly executed. The bit may be set to OFF (“0”) so that the prize ball command is not written in the transmission information storage area.

  In this prize ball control process, the main control program detects the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the big prize opening 2103 in the first special game state. In response to being written in the definition bit area corresponding to the big winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out, and the transmission information storage area described above Write to. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 to be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the speaker, for example, “ The sound “Pokon” is output.

  On the other hand, in the first special gaming state, the main control program detects detection information based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the special winning opening 2103 in the special winning opening 2103. If not written in the corresponding definition bit area, for example, a prize ball command is not created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out. Also in this case, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means). Prevent the game ball payout operation from being executed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103 and clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 to allow the game ball to be paid out. To do.

  At this time, the main control program, when paying out more than the specified number of payouts that can be paid out in response to the acceptance of the game balls to the big prize opening 2103, is an excessive payout abnormality command (not shown in FIG. 36). ) In the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step SS92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the speaker to perform predetermined notification.

  In this way, since a substantially illegal game ball is not paid out, damage to the game hall (game hall) can be minimized.

  On the other hand, instead of the main control program, when it is detected that a game ball has been received at the special winning opening 2103, the main control program immediately writes an excessive winning abnormality command in the transmission information storage area to control the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The speaker may be informed.

  Thereafter, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  As described above, when a game ball is received for the special winning opening 2103, it can be confirmed by hearing whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning.

  On the other hand, if the payer ACK signal notifying the payout control board 4110 that the payout control board 4110 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control program determines whether the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program executes various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 37 (for example, frame status 1 command, error canceling navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error canceling navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 4110 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reformats the command received normally as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status display in FIG. 36 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the game is not in the big hit gaming state, when it is detected by the count switch 2110 that a game ball has entered the big winning opening 2103, the main control program is Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 36 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program updates the above-described jackpot determination random number by +1 by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. That is, triggered by a winning award (establishment of the start condition), the value of the above-mentioned counter is taken out for each start storage information for which the start condition is satisfied, and used as a big hit random number value. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also expressed as “special lottery”. The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are met) ), The normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state. The jackpot game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, which will be described later, and indicates a game state in which these are collectively called.

  The main control program determines, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time, and the like as data for defining the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (see FIG. 103) described later when determining the jackpot game mode. Definition that is a partial storage area of the main control built-in RAM that is specified by an address that is offset from the opening time and the game ball winning limit count number according to the number of big winning mouths. Reading from a data area (not shown).

  By the way, a subroutine, which is a program module constituted by a set of program codes, is generally called after a CALL instruction included in a main routine and a program code group included in the program module is executed. The return instruction is used to return to the main routine (see the first reference above). In this case, since an instruction for calling back is required, at first glance, it seems difficult to reduce the program capacity.

  However, in this embodiment, when the main routine includes a continuous subroutine, for example, after the main routine calls and executes the first subroutine with the CALL instruction, the next subroutine is called with another CALL instruction continuously. In addition, a return instruction may not be arranged at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, but may be connected directly to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine. With the program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

  In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described above, the main control program determines whether or not the random number for jackpot matches the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. The main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the lottery result, and the random number for jackpot matches the probability variation determination value (the probability variation transition condition is satisfied). In this case, the game is shifted to the probability variation state. On the other hand, if the jackpot random number value does not match the probability variation determination value (the condition after probability variation is not satisfied), the game state other than the probability variation is transitioned ( Winning probability control means). Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

  Further, in this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program is shown in FIG. If the lottery result is triggered by the acceptance of a game ball at the second start port 2102, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are generated. Create The main control program stores the command thus created in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  At the same time, the main control program determines a start hold display mode with reference to a preceding determination table (not shown) based on various random values acquired in response to the start winning, and displays the change after the start winning. Before disclosing the special symbol stop symbol, a command (hereinafter referred to as “reserved ball number change” as an example) is executed to imply a special lottery result (hereinafter referred to as “preceding judgment process”). Command ”), and when the preceding determination process is to be executed, it is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At this time, the main control program includes information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game, as will be described later, instead of the random value itself of the special lottery. I am doing so. Details of the preceding determination process will be described later.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to light the first special symbol display 1185 according to the variation display pattern determined at the time of starting winning according to the type of the special symbol, or displays the second special symbol display. The output of the lighting signal is set so that the device 1186 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. When the main control program shifts to the jackpot gaming state, for example, the various commands classified into the jackpot relation shown in FIG. Display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information and the opening / closing member 2107 is opened / closed by the attacker solenoid 2108A or the attacker The output of the drive signal to the solenoid 2108B is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control program sets two rounds so that the two-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on when the number of times (rounds) the grand prize winning opening 2103 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is six, the six-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. Set the lighting signal output to the 6-round display lamp and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or turn on the 12-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the round is 12 times To set the output of the lighting signal to the 12-round display lamp and store it in the output information storage area as output information, Und is stored in the output information storage area as output information to set the output of the lighting signal to the 16 rounds indicator lamp to turn on the 16 rounds indicator lamp round display 1190 (not shown) when a 16 times. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the gaming state indicator 1183 so as to light the presence / absence of the transition to the probability variation state with a predetermined color, and stores it in the output information storage area as output information.

  By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when a winning winning of a game ball is triggered, a special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and a jackpot lottery is executed. When the condition is satisfied, the lighting state of a so-called probability variation lamp as a gaming state indicator is changed and the state changes to a probability variation state. In this probability variation state, the probability of the big hit lottery described above is set to be relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and the big win is achieved (the first described above). See references). In this way, as a gaming machine that may transition to the probability variation state after the probability variation state has ended, the probability variation state is mainly continued until the next big hit, as if the jackpot game is looped. (Hereinafter referred to as a “loop machine”), and a probability variation state that continues until the special symbol fluctuation count reaches a predetermined number after the jackpot game ends (hereinafter referred to as an “ST (special time) machine”. ")" Exists. As described above, the pachinko machines of different types of the probability variation state continue to have different control of the game state display described above, and in the development stage, the control of the game state display is designed for each model one by one. It was difficult to improve development efficiency.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is received at the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied. If the winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is determined as the normal gaming state. The display mode of the game state display 1183 is set to the lighting state while the state is shifted to the probability variation state set relatively higher than the above. The main control program then sets the display state of the game state indicator 1183 to a specific interrupt cycle when the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, and the probability variation state is continued. The display state of the game state indicator 1183 is changed from the light-off state to the light-on state again within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

  Specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied after the game ball is received at the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. (The lottery means), and if the winning condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, while if the winning condition is satisfied and the probability change transition condition is satisfied, The probability transition condition is shifted to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is set to be relatively higher than the normal gaming state (gaming state control means). While this probability control state continues, the main control program keeps the display state of the game state indicator 1183 in the lighting state, while the game state indicator 1183 displays the display state when a transition is made to a game state other than the probability change state. The mode is turned off (lighting mode control means). When the main control program turns on the display state of the game state indicator 1183 in response to the transition to the probability variation state described above, and then the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, After the probability variation state is continued, the display state of the game state indicator 1183 is temporarily changed from the lighting state to the extinguishing state within a specific interrupt cycle, and then the game is performed within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the extinguished state to the lit state again (lit state continuation control means). Although the player wants to visually recognize that the probability variation state continues, the display state of the game state indicator 1183 can be changed for a very short time as described above. It is possible to make it appear as if the display state of the game state display 1183 has not changed on the visual of the player.

  If it does in this way, it will be difficult to visually recognize that it turned off once, and it will be visually recognized as if the lighting state continues on the display mode of game state indicator 1183. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability variation state continues continuously, the probability variation state continues until the specified number of variations of the special symbol after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, even if it is a so-called ST (special time) machine that shifts to the probability fluctuation state again when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified fluctuation number, the program code that controls the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 between different models Can be shared. As a result, the development efficiency of different types of pachinko machines can be improved.

  Furthermore, in this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied as described above, Further, when the probability variation transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the state is also shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state (gaming state control means). Here, the main control program may be shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state without substantially paying out the game ball in the big hit gaming state. The specific gaming state may be a state in which the time-shortening operation condition is established as another example of the transition condition and the time-shortening function is in operation. It may be in a gaming state. This main control program manages the remaining number of times of display change of a special symbol during a period from a certain gaming state to another gaming state, and transmits gaming state information indicating the managed gaming state. By writing it in the transmission information storage area as information, it is then transmitted in the command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interruption period (game state notification means).

  Specifically, when the above-described probability change transition condition is satisfied in this main control program, special symbols are variably displayed until the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability change game state, for example, the normal game state. Information related to the remaining number of times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number of times information”) is included in one of the commands transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, the change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern By writing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, it is then transmitted in the command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interruption period (remaining fluctuation count notification means). The main control program may include the remaining number of times information described above in other commands, or may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the main control program reads input information from the input information storage area described above and performs a gate winning process based on this input information. In this gate winning process, the main control program determines from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, the main control program extracts the value of the counter for updating the above-described normal random number for determination per symbol when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, and stores the main control built-in RAM as gate information. Is stored in the gate information storage area.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following such a gate winning process, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, and extracts the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol from the read gate information. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as “normal lottery”). The main control program determines whether to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 according to the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery). When the main control program performs an opening / closing operation based on this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2105 are in an open state, so that the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2102 and the game is advantageous to the player. Transition to the state. Furthermore, the main control program determines the normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to the above-described determination based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number value, and is classified into the general symbol synchronization effect related shown in FIG. The command is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and a lighting signal is output to the normal symbol display 1189 so that the normal symbol display 1189 is lit in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Is stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, when the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program reads the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. Various related commands are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start-up solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105, and the output described above as output information. Store in the information storage area. On the other hand, the main control program, when the value of the random number for normal symbol determination taken out does not match the determination value for normal symbol pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern described above. The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above, and various commands classified as related to the common-synchronization effect shown in FIG. 35 are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the determined normal The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a and outputs various signals based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. When the game is in a big hit game state, a driving signal is output to the attacking solenoids 2108A and 2108B for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2103, or a starting opening solenoid for opening / closing the pair of movable pieces 2106 In addition to outputting drive signal to 2105, 2 round jackpot information output signal, 6 round jackpot information output signal, 12 round jackpot information output signal, 16 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display Information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short time medium Output information, and outputs various information (game information) signal to the payout control board 4110 regarding the game, such as start-up hole winning information output signal.

  Subsequent to step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data (command Transmission means). The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process, which is this routine, shown in FIG. Various commands categorized as commands and jackpots (for example, one winning mouth count corresponding to a big winning mouth count command based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 when a game ball entering the big winning mouth 2103 is detected) Display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric effect, various classified as notification display shown in FIG. Commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.), various commands (frame Position 1. command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control unit) ) Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 A body frame release command (second body frame release command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (body frame command sending means, second body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means, and second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S92, the main control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96) and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[12. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 91. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 75, and FIG. 77 is a payout control part following FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interruption process, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process, and FIG. 80 is a sprocket. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball spot determination process, and FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning ball stock number adding process for renting a ball, and FIG. 84 is an example of the stock monitoring process. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball movement determination setting process, FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout setting process, and FIG. 87 is an example of the ball movement setting process. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the error release operation determination process. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) and payout operation (A) from the CR unit during a payout operation by ball lending.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interruption processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball spot determination processing, award Prize ball stock count addition processing for balls, prize ball stock count addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, payout ball engagement operation determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball engagement operation setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency A counter reset determination process and an error release operation determination process will be described. Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, ball rental prize ball number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball movement determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball stock number for prize ball Addition processing, winning ball stock number addition processing for lending, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball engagement operation judgment setting processing Priority in turn has been set.

[12-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110 controls the payout control unit power as shown in FIGS. 75 to 77 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Process at the time of input. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program sets the interrupt mode in the payout control MPU 4110a (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 4110a. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 4110a are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage. A warning signal (paid outage warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 952 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. On the other hand, if the operation switch 952 is operated because it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW. judge.

  When the operation switch 952 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). In other words, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4110a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. (Pinning control side power-on operation control means). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 4110a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area Flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the set status (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. Is done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (at power-off) described later. (Step S526). If they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally terminated, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, information at the time of power recovery is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 4110a (hereinafter referred to as “ROM with built-in payout control”). This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the payout control program reads the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes a payout control side RAM clear process triggered by detection of an operation signal of the operation switch 952 (payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether a power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is used as the power failure warning signal. 4100 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when not elapsed. Is set.

  When the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) has been input. Determine.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms have elapsed, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 4110a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 66) have been received normally, payout motor 839 Various information such as drive information for performing drive control, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 839, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 953, and the like are stored. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or a payout motor A driving signal is output to 839, or the number of balls that the payout motor 839 actually pays out the game balls is notified of the prize ball number information. (In this embodiment, every time the payout motor 839 actually pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal plate 784), or an error occurs. A display signal is output to the LED display 953.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 4110a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 952, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847, a detection signal from the counting switch 838, a detection signal from the full switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal, The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when the determination is made as to whether or not a ball stagnation state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted, the ball swatch determination set as the determination condition is performed. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, and when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 1 is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full with the stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply path of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball break switch 821, the determination condition is as follows. In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time, the number of game balls that are received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body, the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 838, Inconsistency set with the determination condition when determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of the game ball due to inconsistency is repeatedly performed Time management of counter reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball breakage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of subtraction becomes 0. The removal determination time, full tank determination time, ball breakage determination time, and inconsistency counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. Determine. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 4110 a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set on the basis of payout information relating to payout (PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the signal logic state is set).

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation should be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 4110a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 and pays off the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. are restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. Exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure And it is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Thus, various signals generated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. The data is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 4110a to the CR unit 6. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. That is, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process As an example of setting the error status output to the CR unit 6, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit 6 The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless lending request signal from the CR unit 6, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal in the port input process of step S550, that is, a pachinko game. When the machine 1 is powered on and when the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the payout of the ball is made. When the logic state of the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a while the logic state of the PRDY signal is HI, In other words, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are used for lending devices such as game balls. When it is not electrically connected via the connection terminal board 869, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and the payout control MPU 4110a has a predetermined state. Is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the output port. Note that the logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 4110 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control program performs a full tank and ball break check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space of the above-mentioned foul cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether the game ball is full or the number of game balls taken into the supply path of the award ball device 740 described above based on the detection signal from the ball break switch 821 becomes a predetermined number or more. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the game balls stored is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms and the full tank and full ball check processing at this time. The detection signal from 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is turned OFF in the last full (2 ms before) full ball and ball check check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON from OFF. When the transition is made, the time for the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the above-mentioned state information memory stores the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. Store in the area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply path of the award ball apparatus 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, When the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON, when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch 821 is ON from OFF When the transition is made, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball break switch 821 is ON in the full tank and ball break check processing. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 821 is ON, the ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is displayed. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 821 is OFF, the ball break is transmitted to the effect that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control program performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 66) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, retry operations are judged, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. To do.

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 of the payout control board 4110 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number based on this piece of ball information, the corresponding display data (In this embodiment, a display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame) classified into the status display shown in FIG. The main control board is created by creating an opening command, a body frame closing command, a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), an error canceling navigation command (corresponding to the first error canceling command) and a frame state 2 command) To 4100. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, a frame state 1 command is issued. It is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. Further, in this command transmission process, this payout control program, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error relating to a game ball payout operation, for example, information relating to the location of the error that has occurred with respect to this payout operation (hereinafter referred to as “the game ball payout operation”). A frame status 1 command (first error cancellation command) including “error occurrence position information”) is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, if the payout control program indicates that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 952 has been detected, the error described above. A cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) is output (command sending means). The payout control program transmits a body frame release command (first body frame release command) when a body frame release detection signal is input from the body frame release switch 619 (body frame command sending means, 1 body frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). On the other hand, the payout control program transmits a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) when a main body frame close detection signal is input from the main body frame open switch 619 (main body frame command sending means, first 1 body frame command sending means). Further, the payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) when a door frame opening detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618 (door frame command sending means; 1 door frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). On the other hand, when a door frame closing detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). In addition, this payout control program reads out error information including error contents from the above-described state information storage area in the above-described command transmission process (step S566) and identifies machine number information for identifying itself from other pachinko gaming machines. An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. Upon receipt of this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned machine number information and error information to the radio device possessed by the hall clerk, and this hall clerk provides the pachinko game of the machine number based on this machine number information. In the machine, it can be recognized that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540. If this power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is not input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. When 2 ms has elapsed, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548 In step S550, port input processing is performed. In step S552, Immediate update processing is performed, CR communication processing is performed in step S554, full tank and out of ball check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, and main processing is performed in step S562. Operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. . The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for processing of the payout control MPU 4110a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 4110a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control program stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 839 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program performs prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4110a is reset, and then the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU4110a. Note that the processing of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and a payout control unit power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[12-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 78 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Then, the register is switched (saved) (step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, a value of 1 when 2 ms elapses, and a value of 0 when 2 ms elapses. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control program sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[12-3. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation process, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 847 shown in FIG. 17 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout control program from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 79 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). A history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 847 is stored as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S610, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 (step S612). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 in the input information, the payout control program detects the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. It is determined that the shaft is in a state where the shaft has transitioned from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 is changed from the blocked state to the non-blocked state in step S612, the payout control program performs the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process (step S614). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, and is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs a shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information (step S618). . In the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the payout control program performs the same process as the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process in step S614, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. From the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, such as B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. Shift one bit at a time.

  Subsequent to step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  Thus, each time this rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the detection slit rotates after the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. The least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or a value depending on the state in which the optical axis of the angular switch 847 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 847 can be created.

[12-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotator is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is completed. Thereby, rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 839 can be reliably started in a state in which no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control unit 4110 of the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute a fixed position determination skip flag SKP− as shown in FIG. 80 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is to be performed, and is 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping). The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed).

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program stores the rotation angle switch history information in the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are 0 and the lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the above described detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847, continuously in four timer interruption cycles. Is a state in which the state is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. In the occurrence of the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 839 shown in FIG. 17 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 839 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since these first gear, second gear, and third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation is designed to correspond to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 839, in this embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the rotation angle switch 847 Detection signal history, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 79, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, This is performed based on a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 when the latest four timer interruption periods occur. As a result, in the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 839 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash. Can do. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 839. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program A value 1 is set to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). Thereby, it can set so that the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is not performed (skip). The payout control MPU 4110a sets the rotation position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

  Subsequent to step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of recesses of the payout rotating body, and is formed equally (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 839 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 839.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 839 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit has a rotation angle. The state in which the optical axis of the switch 847 is changed from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position determination state”), and (3) the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the cutoff state. And three states (the “fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state in (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 839, the fixed position fixed state in (2) corresponds to four step rotation of the payout motor 839, and the fixed position determination skip state in (3). Corresponds to 13 steps of rotation of the payout motor 839, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body, is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Is set. As described above, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4110a subtracts the skip determination time, and sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG when the subtraction result becomes a value 0.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632 is performed. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step 4 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. . Note that the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply path of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball apparatus 740 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with a rotation angle switch 847. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Further, the wiring (harness) for connecting the payout control board 4110 and the board 754 in the prize ball case 740 in the prize ball apparatus 740 shown in FIG. Cheap.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the precision of the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is increased. In addition, since the period and period required for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[12-5. Spherical spot detection processing]
Next, the sphere collision determination process will be described. In this ball collision determination process, it is determined whether or not a ball collision state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted.

  When the ball collision determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Subsequent to step S640, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program This routine is finished as it is, assuming that the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 847 has changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the dispensing rotator is rotating and no ball-spinning state has occurred. To do.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out at step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S642, a sphere is seen. A value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-spinning state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When no operation is performed, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball collision determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. When this ball stagnation determination time becomes effective, the sphere stagnation determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. .

[12-6. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The prize ball stock number addition process includes a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball stock number addition process is performed from the main control board 4100. This is a process for adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game ball is paid out by the prize ball device 740, it is set so that the number of prize ball stock for lending is added.

[12-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition processing for the prize ball is started, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout control program as shown in FIG. 82 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  When the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program receives the prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). This award ball stock PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in this embodiment has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). ing. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. Note that after the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[12-6-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the award ball stock number adding process for lending is started, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout request as shown in FIG. 83 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is no lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when there is a lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program reads the prize ball information in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The winning ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the rented ball number RBV is added to the winning ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is finished. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S664, the payout control program deletes the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in this embodiment, the winning ball is prioritized (the winning ball and the lending are managed separately), so even if there is a lending request signal, the lending request signal is held. When a prize ball is paid out, a rental ball is paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of the rented ball is performed after the prize ball stock PBS reaches the value 0.

[12-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues playing the game in a state where the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is filled with the stored game balls (stocked state). It is processing to do.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to display the award ball information in the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 84 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the careful threshold value TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S674), and the routine is terminated. The caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of game balls not paid out (the number of prize balls described above) exceeds the caution threshold TH. This flag indicates that the value has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value exceeds the caution threshold TH, and to a value of 0 when the threshold value does not exceed the caution threshold TH.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S676), and this routine is ended.

  When the game state becomes a big hit, and the player relaxes and looks at the effects unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 shown in FIG. During one round, the game ball paid out as a prize ball may not be pulled out by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with game balls, and the game balls are accumulated in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540. When the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the award ball stock PBS increases to exceed the caution threshold TH, and is provided in the door frame 5 as a caution effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform a hall clerk of paying attention to the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player that he / she wants to remove the game ball from the lower plate 302, and the player fills the lower plate 302 (the storage space of the foul cover unit 540) with the game ball full. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the careful threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game as early as possible.

[12-8. Dispensing ball edge motion determination setting process]
Next, the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process will be described. This paying ball ball movement determination setting process is performed by paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. This is a process for setting whether or not to discharge or not.

  When the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process is started, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 has the payout control program built in the payout control described above as shown in FIG. 85 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

  Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 shown in FIG. 17 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S682, when the payout control program matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation). When the operation is normal), the value is set to 0.

  If it is determined in step S682 that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not operating abnormally, the payout control program determines whether or not the ball colliding flag PBE-FLG is a value 1. Is determined (step S686). This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-spinning state is generated by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. A value of 1 is set when the motion is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the ball motion is not performed.

  If the ball-picking flag PEB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S686, that is, if a ball-pushing operation is not performed, the payout control program stores the award ball information in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 839.

  When the winning ball stock PBS is larger than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full. Is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check process in step S556 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area to determine whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls.

  When the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full in step S692, the payout control program performs payout setting processing (to be described later) (step S694), and this routine is ended. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 839 is forcibly stopped when the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 839 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 839 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not greater than 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, when the ball bending flag PBE-FLG is 1 in step S686, that is, when the ball bending operation is being performed, the payout control program performs a ball bending operation setting process described later (step S700). Exit. In this ball-spinning operation setting process, a ball-spinning operation that cancels the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal, the payout control program sets output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 839. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets an error status output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present (CR unit 6). The logic of the PRDY signal from LOW, that is, held down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information And stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. In some cases (when the EXS signal is held up), the logic HI is maintained.

[12-8-1. Withdrawal setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 839 is driven to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to set the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 86 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. Read (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 839, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 839 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 839 is zero, the payout control program stops outputting (stopping) the drive signal to the payout motor 839. ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the real ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 839. This count will be described in detail later, but in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control section power-on process (payout control section main process) shown in FIG. This is performed based on the detection signal. The real ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the real ball count PB is read from this prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), a value 0 is set to the real ball count PB (Step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 839, the payout control program sets an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 839. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether there is a detection signal from the count switch 838 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 838 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program adds 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and this routine is finished. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a, and when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the determination in step S728, that is, If the ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 was transmitted. to decide. Therefore, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. Thus, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, a retry operation of paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing this retry operation, the possibility of unpaid game balls to the player can be extremely reduced, and a player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented.

[12-8-2. Spherical motion setting process]
Next, the spherical cornering operation setting process will be described. In this ball-spinning operation setting process, the setting is made to cancel the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 of the prize ball device 740 is transmitted.

  When the ball staking operation setting process is started, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to pass the ball scouring determination time as shown in FIG. 87 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is performed based on the ball collision determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball collision determination time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S750 that the ball collision determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752). .

  Subsequent to step S752, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the home position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 is set so as to perform the ball collapsing operation (step S756), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 839 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value of 0 to the in-ball flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-bending operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This in-between-ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-bending state due to the payout rotating body has occurred, and is 1 when the payout motor 839 is in a ball-bending operation. When no operation is being performed (end of the ball collapsing operation), the value is set to 0.

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 839 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 839 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S762, the payout control program sets an error state output to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 4110a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, The logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained, is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . As described above, “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that the logic LOW is maintained when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of HI is HI (the EXS signal is held high), the logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets a value “0” to the ball-balling flag PBE-FLG as the ball-balling operation ends (step S766), and the routine is terminated.

[12-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not a retry operation for paying out a game ball that should be paid out is performed normally.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute the rotation angle of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 88 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the switch history information storage area (step S770).

  Subsequent to step S770, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 847 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). The inconsistency counter INCC includes the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted, the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838, This is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of game balls received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838 coincides with each other. The value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 86. Therefore, by this retry operation, the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body, and the actual counting switch Whether or not the game balls that are not consistent with the number of balls detected at 838 are repeatedly paid out is repeatedly determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the count switch 838 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrements, step S778). .

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). ). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth, and in this embodiment, the mismatch threshold value The value 5 is set as INCTH.

  In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 77, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control built-in RAM when power is restored. Information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC just before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information Can be done. As a result, in the determination in step S780, the game ball payout operation (retry operation) performed by the prize ball device 740, which has been performed until immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, a prize ball It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the device 740 is in a normal state, and it can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780 even during power recovery. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. Even when power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the game ball payout by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program displays “Retry error”. In order to notify the fact that the error is, the retry error information for displaying the number “5” is set on the error LED display 953 which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110, and the payout control built-in RAM described above is set. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that “the prize ball is in stock”, the payout control program sets the information in the prize ball stock to display the number “9” on the error LED display 953 and incorporates the above-described payout control. It is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

  Subsequent to step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. When the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the external factor occurs. When the operation switch 952 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 16 as a RAM clear signal. The main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM and controls the RAM clear notification command as shown in FIG. 16 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a. 4140. Thereby, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S786), and this routine is terminated. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is not performed). It is set to a value of 0 when operating normally).

  Note that the payout control program shows the retry error information (or information in stock of winning balls) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. In the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 in the command transmission process in step S566, and LED display data creation in step S564 in the process is performed. Display data to be displayed on the error LED display 953 is created in the process and stored in the output information storage area as LED display information, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process in step S548 in the process is stored. Based on this, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 953. To display the number "5" on the error LED display device 953. In the main control board 4100 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This peripheral control board 4140 emits a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red), and outputs a lighting signal on the door frame side. Are output to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and a plurality of LEDs are caused to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the store clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to thereby display a number "" on the error LED display 953 mounted on the payout control board 4110. By visually observing that “5” is displayed, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. Thereby, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the store clerk of the hall, etc. confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 838, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 4110, and the contact failure of various connectors. Compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED display 953 are not notified, the process can be performed very quickly.

  In addition, it has been described above that it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted by intentionally disabling the counting switch 838. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Since the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, a hall clerk or the like rushes to confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Therefore, damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 838 can be suppressed to an extremely small level.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor occurs, for example, when the operation switch 952 is operated to cancel the error. Therefore, even if the operation switch 952 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4110a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. Absent.

[12-10. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the number of game balls received and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838 This is a process for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute the inconsistency counter reset determination time as shown in FIG. 89 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794). Exit. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the counting switch 838 and the number of game balls received and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted. This is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls, and the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body is usually equal to the number of balls detected by the counting switch 838. As a result, the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 86 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. The inconsistency counter INCC is used to determine whether or not the game balls that are inconsistent due to the discrepancy between the number and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 838 are repeatedly paid out. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit in due to a retry operation is paid out is about one millionth.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the game board 5 and the frame body such as the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is mounted as described above, and the game board 5 is exchanged (new stand replacement). Since the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740, the power supply board 851 for generating the driving power for the prize ball device 740 and the control power for the payout control board 4110 are common. Equipped on the frame side as a function. In the payout control unit 4110 on the payout control board 4110, the payout control program monitors the inconsistency counter INCC as described above under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed. The payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 77 stores an inconsistency counter INCC immediately before shutting off when the power is turned off. In the process of step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process shown in 76 (setting of the RAM work area when power is restored), the process is started again from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on.

  Then, when the game board 5 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is switched to a game board 5 ′ having another game specification different from the game board 5 and turned on, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 on the board 4110 starts processing again from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 5 ′ attached thereto, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 5 before replacement is inherited as it is. For this reason, when a player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 5 'mounted, the probability of 1 / million million happens that the number of game balls that do not match is inconsistent, and the inconsistent counter INCC When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ′, and is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation by the payout control MPU 4110a in a short period of time. There is a risk. In other words, in a short period after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ′, malfunction of the counting switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. In spite of this, there is a possibility that it is suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation.

  In this way, when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the impression that the replaced game board 5 ′ is likely to break down despite being new. May be given to players. The probability of a millionth of a game ball being paid out due to a retry operation is one millionth of the time when a pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and operated continuously for one week during the hall's business hours. Since the probability that one game ball that does not fit in due to the retry operation is paid out is the same, the probability of one-millionth from the inconsistency counter INCC in the processing of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. Thus, the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, the value 1 is incremented to the mismatch counter INCC in one week and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 1, and the value 1 is further incremented in the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 2 in 2 weeks. In week, value 1 is further incremented in inconsistency counter INCC, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 3, in value 4 in inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 4, and in week 5 The value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above. That is, when 5 weeks have elapsed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control program performs the control in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 88 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the counting switch 838, and a malfunction of the counting switch 838, disconnection of various harnesses extending to the payout control board 4110 from the counting switch 838, contact failure of various connectors, and the like occur. This is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110 in order to notify that it is a “retry error” in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 88. Retry error to display number “5” on error LED display 953 Set the broadcast becomes possible to set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control chip RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4110a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination in step S790 in the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the inconsistency counter INCC to 0, that is, forcibly resetting the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, the inconsistency counter INCC that is generated with the probability of 1 / million million is increased. Invalidated. As a result, there is an error in the retry operation even though the malfunction of the counting switch 838, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like have not occurred. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Note that the game ball that is received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 839 is transmitted by deliberately disabling the counting switch 838 is difficult to detect. In the case where the counting switch 838 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short time even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, In this way, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that the store clerk or the like of the hall changes the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 I will rush to confirm. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. On the other hand, when the count switch 838 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not exceed the mismatch threshold INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is During this period, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent action is, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC is up to the mismatch threshold INCTH, and the count switch 838 is intentionally set. Even if the player is repeatedly inactivated for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act can be extremely reduced.

[12-11. Error release operation determination process]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 952 shown in FIG. 17 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to release the error of the operation switch 952 as shown in FIG. 90 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a. It is determined whether or not it has been operated (step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 952 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area, and determines that the error cancellation is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI. When the operation switch 952 is determined not to be operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, the operation switch 952 is determined to be instructed to cancel the error. It is determined that

  When the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs error flag state confirmation processing. This is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various types of error information regarding the prize ball device 740 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is operating normally), respectively. Therefore, the payout control program confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  Subsequent to step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this status information setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the status information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (status information) is read from the status information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 77, and the read status Based on the information, a status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, it indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control section power-on process (payout control section main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits the main control program to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the control board 4140, the sub-control program performs a retry operation error notification process for reporting that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” 2 times) By repeatedly flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is like that. A store clerk or the like who has heard this retry operation error notification announces a malfunction of the counting switch 838 shown in FIG. 17, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 838 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. Can be confirmed very quickly as compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. In the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red).

  Subsequent to step S804, the payout control program performs release setting processing (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the error flag state indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is in a state where the content displayed by the error LED display 953 which is a segment display already mounted on the payout control board 4110 can be forcibly stopped or lent out. In this case, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the state in which the PRDY signal is raised is held, and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is connected to the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110. Or output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the error LED display 953 has already displayed. The retry error information stored in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is “normal” in order to forcibly stop the number “5” for informing that the “retry error” is present. This is forcibly overwritten on the information on which the graphic “-” for informing the effect is displayed. Further, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be lent out, the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a. Output to the CR unit 6 through the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  Subsequent to step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, if the error flag status indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. .

  As described above, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 88 and the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, this internal factor is determined. In response to the occurrence of the error, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in the process of step S786 of the same process. On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is operated, this causes the external factor. When this occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated to clear the RAM when the operation switch 952 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, that is, the operation switch 952 clears the RAM to release the error. Similar to the case where the switch 952 is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main process on the main control side is executed from the time the power is turned on to the operation switch 952 (operation switch) that was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error that has occurred regarding the payout operation. Instead, for the predetermined time until the operation is performed, an operation for exhibiting a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) instead. It functions as a part. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 causes the operation switch 952 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the game ball payout operation after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the hall clerk is not familiar with the operation of the pachinko gaming machine, as long as he remembers the position of the operation switch 952 on the back of the gaming machine, according to the timing of operating the operation switch 952, If the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the function of canceling the error that occurred with respect to the game ball paying-out operation is exhibited, while depending on the timing when the operation switch 952 is operated, If it is within the predetermined time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exhibited. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can take appropriate action without hesitating the switch operation by improving the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of handling the error, so that the game is interrupted. The game can be resumed before the played player loses his willingness to play.

[12-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 77 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount is performed twice) is used as the number of rented balls. The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. Confirms the logical state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms that is the interrupt timer period.

[12-12-1. Signal processing during payout by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out a rental ball. When the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible is set, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible. In order to transmit the signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, raised and held, and output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110. It outputs to CR unit 6 via board 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player pushes the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. 2, the ball rental switch 365b is switched on (turned on). The operation signal is input as TDS shown in FIG. 18 from the frequency display board 365 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is inputted pays out the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls, so as shown in FIG. 91 (a) The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4110a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), the payout control MPU 4110a to which this BRDY signal is input has a payout control program that starts from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms. A predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls) in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the gaming device lending device connection terminal plate 869 until the time elapses. , Which corresponds to 100 yen as a monetary amount) is monitored whether or not a BRQ which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out the money rises.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls, FIG. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, and the signal is Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (c), the payout control MPU 4110a, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses, the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in this embodiment, Is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms.) In order to notify that the one-time payout operation has started, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the start-up state is maintained and the payout control MPU 4110a Is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port and output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball (timing H3).

  In the CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the lending instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, set to 20 ms to 58 ms) elapses from the timing H3. The BRQ that has been started up and held from timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 91C, the payout control MPU 4110a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses. Then, only the predetermined number of rented balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. When the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal that is raised and held from the timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a while keeping its logic at LOW, that is, in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the rented number, FIG. ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. 869 is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4110a), and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 4110a pays out the remaining 100 yen of game balls to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 91 (c). The EXS signal that has been started up and held is set to the logic level LOW, that is, held in the lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and as the EXS, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal It outputs to CR unit 6 via board 869 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the CR unit 6 starts from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in this embodiment, the maximum setting is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The raised BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4110a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The lending request monitoring time HA, the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, the lending instruction monitoring time HC, the dispensing monitoring time HD, the next request confirmation timing HE, and the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF described above are the dispensing control shown in FIG. The time is counted by the timer update process in step S552 in the power-on process (payout control part main process).

  Note that the payout control MPU 4110a does not communicate with the CR unit 6 when a ball breakage, a ball round, a counting switch error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. occurs (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6). Is held LOW, that is, held down, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing H1 is set to the logic LOW, that is, the state is lowered. It is held and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and being held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and paid out. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined | prescribed output port of control MPU4110a, and outputs to CR unit 6 via the lending apparatus connection terminal board 869, such as game balls, as EXS. “Keep the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. The logical HI is maintained when the EXS signal is held up.

  In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4110a uses the number of game balls for 200 yen as the money amount as 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls having the number of lent out balls of 50 are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. A hall clerk or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used for the upper plate 301 or When set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4110a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a monetary amount once, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as a monetary number When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4110a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as an amount of money five times, and sets the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of rented balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4110a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[12-12-2. Checking input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110 in the payout control board 4110 is configured such that the CR unit 6 performs BRQ via the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball even when the lending request monitoring time HA has elapsed. When the signal is not started up or when the above-described lending instruction monitoring time HC elapses, the CR unit 6 connects BRDY to the lending device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal board 869, even when the signal has not fallen or when the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. When the signal is not started up or output to the payout control board 4110 via the ball lending device connection terminal board 869 or as described above. Even after the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY to the payout control board 4110 from the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball, and the signal is lowered. If not, the above-described PRDY and EXS are used to check whether BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 91 (e) and 91 (f), the payout control MPU 4110a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and starts a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment) from this timing J0. After the elapse of time, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the state in which the PRDY signal is lowered is held and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control unit 4110. Then, PRDY is output to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a Is output to the CR unit 6 through the rental device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball. To force (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J1 after the elapse of a predetermined period JB from the timing J1 (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) as its logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of a predetermined period JC from the timing J2 (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) as the logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state, outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and outputted as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3). ).

  Subsequently, after the elapse of a predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J3, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the PRDY signal to be held down from the timing J3 as HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J4 after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, set to 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4 as the logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4110a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J5 as the logic HI after a predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, set to 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J5. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4110a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6). ).

  The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[13. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receive various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 94 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control part power failure warning signal interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

[13-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[13-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. Various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by, for example, writing “0” in the storage area of the built-in VRAM in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20, effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms)) ( ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the peripheral backup SRAM 4150d is also compared with the production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. At the same time, the production backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in the Bank 3 (SRAM) and the Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to the Bank0 (SRAM) that is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 20). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 4150cf in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 20) to clear it to zero. Then, after performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 19) so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control unit power-on process, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in this contact sensitivity adjustment function at power-on, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 when power supply is started by the power control unit (initial contact sensitivity adjustment means). ). Specifically, first, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481 stores a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state. The touch panel controller 481 uses the initial value of a predetermined contact determination threshold (hereinafter referred to as “initial contact”) as the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a in response to the start of power supply by the power supply control unit. Also referred to as “determination threshold”.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 4, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, a luminance setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is obtained. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Is turned on by adjusting the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Lights with the brightness adjusted. In this liquid crystal display device luminance setting process, the same correction as the above-described luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission for the lamp driving board serial I / O port is started, the game board 5 is stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A state in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided is created and set in a lamp data creation process to be described later It has become.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored at the head address of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (rotation direction) ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Monitor the presence or absence of operation of the unit 405, Appropriately determined whether to reflect the state of operation of the pressure operation unit 405 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation processing described later is sent from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. The data is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used as the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 246 is canceled. This can prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although a so-called frame drop occurs, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012, and The speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 5 by the effect by the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 and the sound data output processing described later, and shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that can give priority to synchronization with effects produced by music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from the speakers provided on the door frame 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of notification sound and notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music and sound effects adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also generated. Stereo playback.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update processing, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

  In the scheduler update process, the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used from the head drive data. The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in various commands received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analysis). means). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start opening start effect, the number of normal symbols held (0 to 4) ), A symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, and a winning ball 2103 is received by a game ball. The winning prize 1 count display command (big winning prize count command) output every time, or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) indicating the content of the full tank shown in FIG. (Command analyzing means) to recognize which gaming state is currently in progress. In addition, after the predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the effect control program is configured such that the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame opening command, a body frame closing command, a door frame opening command, or a door frame. Analyzes whether or not the command is a close command. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 35 are classified into various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric character effect, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 36, door frame opening command described above , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification are stored in the peripheral control unit 4150. The data is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. In the case of various commands to be executed, for example, an error canceling navigation command (second error canceling command), by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in a manner different from the normal rendering mode accompanying the rendering operation, for example, a game A panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 (effect device), an upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, or a pair of side speakers (effect devices). An external warning is given audibly (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 despite being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs main prize ball number information acquisition processing (step S1025), and then performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data to be performed The peripheral control ROM 4150b of the unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are extracted and created, set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 5 of various decorative boards provided in The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the ED is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is created and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, so that the effect control program is arranged in time series in the peripheral control MPU 4150a as data constituting the screen generation schedule data. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and from the extracted at least one character data. Sprite data is created, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 is created on a built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine, as the progress of the game, it is going to be a mode in which the player's interest is not exhausted by displaying a video composed of a number of material images superimposed on the background image in each frame ( Although the display control is requested to include a larger number of material images in each frame in order to display a wider variety of images, a large number of material images are displayed in each frame. At first glance, including it seems to put a heavy burden on display control.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying the display control of frames including a large number of material images and reducing the processing load, the effect control program is provided for each frame displayed based on the drawing data and each frame. While managing correspondence information in which correspondence relationships with a plurality of material images that can be represented are defined in advance, when the predetermined frame of each frame is to be displayed, the correspondence information is referred to and the predetermined information is referred to. At least one predetermined material image to be included in the frame is specified, and drawing data is included in the built-in sound source VDP 4160a without including the predetermined material image and excluding other material images excluding the predetermined material image. A predetermined frame based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM is generated by being generated and stored in the built-in VRAM (frame buffer). Being displayed on the side the liquid crystal display device 1900 (display unit). This will be specifically described below.

  First, in the present embodiment, at least a part of background image data (hereinafter also referred to as “specific background image data”) out of a large number of background image data used for displaying a large number of background images constituting each frame, At a position where a material image (hereinafter also referred to as “specific sprite”) such as at least one sprite on the background image based on the specific background image data is to be originally arranged (hereinafter referred to as “original arrangement position”), As shown in a display mode that cannot be visually recognized (hereinafter referred to as “confidential state”), it is managed as follows.

  First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the following correspondence linking table (corresponding relationship information management means) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Browse the table. In this correspondence linking table, each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and at least one sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups). Predefined correspondence information is managed together with a concealment release command (confidential release command) for canceling the visual concealment state of the at least one sprite. In this correspondence linking table, each sprite (or each background image) can be identified using a sprite number, and as a part of the correspondence information, the coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame The value is managed.

  In this correspondence linking table, as such correspondence information, for example, at least one material image such as a sprite that can be represented in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and A correspondence relationship with a secrecy cancellation command for canceling the visual secrecy state of the at least one material image is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least one material image is referred to as “desired sprite”.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate drawing data from sprite data based on the scheduler data (drawing management means). When the display control program tries to display a predetermined frame according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery executed when the start condition is satisfied, the correspondence relationship in the correspondence association table is controlled by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. With reference to the information, a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame is specified (material image specifying means).

  Furthermore, the production control program identifies the secrecy release command corresponding to the desired sprite by referring to the correspondence information in the correspondence linking table when the desired sprite is to be represented in a predetermined frame according to the schedule data, The specified concealment release command is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (concealment release instructing means). The secrecy release command includes a sprite number (hereinafter referred to as “desired sprite number”) that can identify a desired sprite whose secrecy state should be released in the predetermined frame. As a result of the output of the secrecy release command, the display state flag of the name tag information is updated to the one that was off in the initial state. The name tag information and its display state flag are prepared for each sprite that can be represented in each frame, and are referred to when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a executes the drawing process.

  Here, the effect control program operates the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) as follows when trying to display a predetermined frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. That is, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a has a display mode in which a desired sprite that can be included in the predetermined frame is kept in a concealed state based on the correspondence information in the correspondence linking table when the concealment release command is not received. Drawing data to be generated in the frame buffer. Thereby, the effect control program can display the frame of the aspect which cannot see the said desired sprite on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 by control of peripheral control MPU4150a.

  On the other hand, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the concealment release command, it confirms that the display state flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included in the concealment release command is updated to ON. As a trigger, the desired sprite corresponding to the secrecy release command is specified with reference to the correspondence information in the correspondence linking table. Furthermore, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a generates rendering data in the frame buffer for canceling the concealed state of the specified desired sprite and setting the display mode so that the desired sprite can be visually recognized. As a result, the effect control program can cause the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame in a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  In this way, the presentation control program does not need to finely manage which sprite group can be represented in each frame when displaying the frame group of a certain scene due to the presence of the correspondence linking table. On the other hand, the sound source VDP 4160a can draw a frame representing each desired sprite by a very simple control compared to the conventional display control of whether or not to output the secrecy release command to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is possible to draw a frame that does not represent any sprite. Thereby, the display control of the frame including a large number of sprites can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, because the correspondence relationship table described above employs a configuration in which the sprite group including the desired sprite is linked to the effect control program (the concealment release command group issued by) to manage the correspondence relationship. In addition, the creation work of sprite data and the design work of the production control program can be completely separated independently, and the design work related to display control can be simplified.

  By the way, as described above, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, in general, sensitivity adjustment is generally performed as an initial process when the power is turned on, and then the device operates with the sensitivity (the first reference above). reference). Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial process in this way, depending on the gaming environment thereafter, it may be considered that the sensitivity gradually becomes inappropriate at first glance.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation processing, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 (second display means) and the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). The function of causing the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 while outputting the effect command (effect execution command) for executing the display operation in a mode for prompting the touch on the operation surface. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for enabling (contact sensitivity adjustment means) is output (command output means). In other words, the effect control program prompts the upper liquid crystal display device 246 to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 with a finger as an effect command (effect execution command) (to the operation surface of the contact type input means). A command for executing the display operation in the mode of prompting the contact of the user is written in the transmission information storage area, and then output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting command means). Next, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, when the command is received, the presentation control program (the display control program by the control thereof) is touched on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) based on the command. A screen in a mode for prompting touching is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246.

  Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel processing, the effect control program mainly detects the contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on the contact detection signal as the detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Contact state detection means). That is, this effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detecting means) that detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. The effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), Operation information including the initial position is acquired. Note that this effect control program may acquire not only such coordinate values but also a range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as a contact range).

  In this touch panel process, in order to deal with the above-mentioned concerns, the presentation control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, separately from the above-described presentation command (production execution command), and then stored in the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored threshold value for contact determination is written in the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) shown in FIG. (Sensitivity adjustment command means).

  Specifically, the effect control program, as the predetermined timing described above, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) has elapsed from the main control MPU 4100a (see FIG. 35) ) When the predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last time, or when the variation time of special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed, 35), the threshold setting command described above is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a.

  The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel 246 is touched when the touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an example of the outside. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. In other words, the effect control program receives the threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a, and based on the threshold setting command, the touch determination stored in the control register 481a. The contact sensitivity by the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the threshold value for use. Specifically, touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command, acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from touch panel sensor 482, and uses this capacitance as the contact surface of touch panel 246. Is determined as a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  After that, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new threshold value for contact determination updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the contact surface is determined to be in a non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is increased at a desired timing triggered by the touch panel controller 481 receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the predetermined threshold value for contact determination is updated, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is appropriately controlled. (Calibration) For this reason, the production control program removes the output timing that may affect the game by the player and causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold setting command, so that the game always affects the touch panel 246 without affecting the game. The detection of a contact state can be made into an appropriate operation mode.

  The timing at which this effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is, for example, as shown above. There is a possibility that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the command or the special figure 2 synchronized production end command has been received, and the player has touched the operation surface of the touch panel 246 because the game has been stopped. Low timing can be illustrated. That is, such contact sensitivity adjustment is performed as much as possible during the special symbol variation display that may be performed using the touch panel 246, and is performed when the variation display is completed. Yes.

  In addition, as a timing at which the threshold setting command should be output, in addition, the effect control program receives from the main control MPU 4100a a normal-synchronization effect end command (see FIG. 35) transmitted when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. It may be a timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has passed.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is a capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 that can store a large number of game balls and easily generate static electricity. Sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing accordingly, and it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such changes in the surrounding environment and not by the player's operation. It becomes difficult to do.

  Subsequent to step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 4160b and controls the sound source data by controlling the sound source. The sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160 c, music and sound effects flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even if a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the hall and the door frame 5 are accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 4. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker is reduced, when the malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the loud sound (in this embodiment, the maximum The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 can be rendered more powerful and advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc shown in FIG. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 20, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is used as Bank0 The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies that the backup second area 4150cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 20, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db by using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in backup first area 4150db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and the Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously, the top address of Bank3 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150dc The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. P2 is specified, and the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) start address to the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) end address is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in a second backup area 4150dc. Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[13-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be received as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Forcibly canceling in the middle and starting execution of the peripheral control unit steady process from the beginning. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. 92, the peripheral control unit steady process is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

[13-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 92 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 performs the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Is less than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 1 ms timer interrupt for the 33rd time is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program is directly executed by this routine. Exit. In the present embodiment, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, when the occurrence of the 1st timer interrupt for the 33rd time happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MP4 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. 20 are arranged in time series. In accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program determines the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to continuously transmit the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 7 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. 20 is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame decoration It is set to send a dynamic amplifier board-side motor data storage area 4150Caf. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and via peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c attached externally Drive to motors and solenoids for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 based on drive data indicated by the pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting signals is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripherals shown in FIG. Motor of control RAM 4150c Set the dynamic substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus obtained is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, original position history information). , The movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a dial operation unit) Rotation (rotation direction) history information 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.), and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. Set to 4150cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110) and a main prize ball number information output process (S1112), and subsequently performs a backup process (step S1114), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up. The production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1) of the backup first area 4150 cb Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in s) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the second backup area 4150cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the head address of) in the backup second area 4150 cc of bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies the copy to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 4150cc. Shi Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 4150 cc from the content stored at the beginning address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 92, various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[13-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 starts the transmission of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data. With this as a trigger, the peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 95 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a mode in which the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated to generate noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. The environment is susceptible. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. 20 shows the status assigned as the first byte and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, as shown in FIG. 20, in the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning Remember. When storing the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is allocated as the received status of the main peripheral serial data as the first byte and the main peripheral serial data as the second byte. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[13-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing will be described. This peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process is executed when a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification). It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 are sequentially turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the above, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. .

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The received command is stored in the ring buffer.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb Then, from the contents stored at the head address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored. Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core The content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied successively in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The PU core 4150aa uses the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the data are copied sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc successively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this manner, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e when the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is not input in step S1312. When the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, “0” is written in the storage area of the built-in VRAM as an example to initialize the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 92 is started again from the beginning. The Rukoto.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed. The output is supposed to be interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The main control board 4100 has a first start port 2101 and a first start port 2101 which are start regions provided in the game region 1100 with game balls launched by the ball striking device 650 toward the game region 1100 defined on the game board 5. A main control MPU 4100a is mounted as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game when it is received by the second start port 2102. The payout control board 4110 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 based on the prize ball commands in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 4100. A payout control MPU 4110a is implemented.

  The main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a. The main control built-in RAM can store information related to the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 4110a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4110a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 952 of FIG. When the operation switch 952 is operated within a period of time during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 72 is performed after the power is turned on, the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. 24 is output from the main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, and the operation is performed during the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 29, a RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the payout control MPU 4110a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information relating to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM; 72 from the main control side power-on process in FIG. When operated after the period during which the determination process of S16 is performed (or the period during which the determination process of step S512 is performed in the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 75 from when the power is turned on), the prize ball device 740 is related. An error canceling function for outputting the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 29 to the payout control MPU 4110a as the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the main control MPU4100a as the game control microprocessor as an error clearing signal for canceling the generated error. It is something to combine.

  As described above, when the operation switch 952 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 72 is performed from when the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. 24 is output to the main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, and the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 75 is performed from the time of power-on. 29, the RAM clear signal for outputting the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 29 to the payout control MPU 4110a as the payout control microprocessor is output as a RAM clear signal for erasing the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Function and processing at power-on of the main control side in FIG. 72 from power-on When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process in step S16 is performed (or the period during which the determination process in step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 75 is performed from when the power is turned on) has passed, An error canceling function for outputting to the payout control MPU 4110a as the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the main control MPU4100a as the game control microprocessor as an error clearing signal for canceling the error that has occurred regarding 740 Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, by an operation with one operation switch 952. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error cancel function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[14. Control processing on main control board]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the first and second start-up winning process shown in FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process shown in FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination process, which is a process of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG. FIG. 104 is an example of a table used for the jackpot gaming state determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. Note that the main control program executes timer interrupt processing every 4 ms, for example.

[Special symbol and special electric accessory control processing]
In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program first executes the first and second start opening winning processes (step S6110). In the first / second start opening winning process, the main control program determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 3022 and is received by the first start opening 2101, or Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port 2109 and the second start port 2102 has received the game ball.

  Next, the main control program first determines whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S6120), and if this processing flag is 0, executes a change start process (step S6130). Note that the processing flag of 0 indicates that, for example, the start condition is satisfied for the start storage information already stored in the start storage information storage area. In this variation start process, the main control program performs settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol based on the result of whether or not a predetermined winning condition is established as a lottery for winning the jackpot, Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to 1.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S6120, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S6140). When this process flag is 1, the main control program executes a variation pattern setting process (step S6150). In this variation pattern setting process, a first mode in which the main control program variably displays the first special symbol (special one symbol) using the first special symbol indicator 1185 every time the start condition is satisfied is defined. A second mode in which a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected and set (variation pattern selection means) or a second special symbol display unit 1186 is used to variably display the second special symbol (special 2 symbol). The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected and set (variation pattern selection means), and then the processing flag is updated to 2. This variation pattern represents the variation time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186. ing.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S6140, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S6170). If this process flag is 2, the following changing process is executed (step S6180). In this changing process, the main control program monitors the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S6150) with a timer, and triggered by the time-out, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second The special symbol change display using the special symbol display 1186 is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the main control program determines that the winning condition for the big hit game is established in the big win lottery in the above-described variation start process (step S6130), the process flag is updated to 3. When the main control program determines that the winning condition for the small hit game is established in the big win lottery in the above-described variation start process (step S6130), the process flag is updated to 5. On the other hand, if the main control program determines that none of the winning conditions is satisfied in the jackpot lottery and the winning flag is not won, the processing flag is updated to zero. In this case, the main control program is executed again from the variation start process (step S6130) in the next timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S6170, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S6190). When the process flag is 3, the main control program executes a jackpot game preparation process (step S6200). In this jackpot game preparation process, the main control program operates a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, to determine the mode of the jackpot game, and this determined jackpot game The mode (for example, the number of rounds) is set, the accessory continuous activation device is activated, and the processing flag is updated to 4.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S6190, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 4 (S6210). When the process flag is 4, the following jackpot game process is executed (step S6220). In this jackpot game process, the main control program determines whether one of the rounds, the number of times to open, the release time, and the game ball winning limit number as the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S6607). The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B is controlled, and then the processing flag is updated to 0. Here, the main control program controls at least one of the first special game and the second special game as the set jackpot game, and in the first special game, the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A is performed. In the second special game, the opening / closing operation of the other opening / closing member 2106B is executed and the opening / closing operation of the one opening / closing member 2106A is restricted.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 in step S6210, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 5 (S6230). When the processing flag is 5, the following process when the small hit is established is executed (S6240). In the small hitting establishment process, the main control program sets the number of opening times and the opening time in order to control the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B as the small hitting game mode. After that, the main control program sets one opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B to an open state only once for a very short time, for example, based on the set number of opening times and opening time. Control is performed so as to be closed later, and then the processing flag is updated to 0. In this case, in the next timer interrupt process, the change start process (step S6130) is performed again. The small hit game is not a game with the operation of a condition device like the big hit game, but is a kind of big hit game, for example. Is a game that is very similar to the game (so-called short open big hit game).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the main control program executes the small hitting establishment process S6240 depending on whether or not the process flag is set to 5 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. Can be selected. That is, if the processing flag is in the range of 0-5, the main control program can be a game including a small hit game, whereas if the processing flag is in the range of 0-4, the main control program does not include the small hit game. It can be a game. As described above, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process includes the program code for the small hit game that can be executed according to the value of the processing flag as in the small hit establishment process S6240. It is assumed that it is not unused program code. That is, the main control program executes another branch process provided in parallel instead of executing the small hitting establishment process S6240. With such a program structure, it is possible to share a program code even among models having different gaming characteristics whether or not a small hit game is included. For example, different models depending on whether or not a small hit game is included There is no need to develop each program code in between.

  As described above, the main control program selectively executes one of the processes of step S6130, step S6150, step S6180, step S6200, step S6220, and step S6240 according to the state of the processing flag described above, and then The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[First and second starting entry prize processing]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second start-up winning process (step S6110) shown in FIG. The first and second start opening winning process (step S6110) is a process related to a determination as to whether or not a game ball has been received at the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102 and that there has been the reception. On the condition that is determined, includes processing for updating the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

[Entering a game ball into the second starting port]
First, the main control program determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port switch 2109 (step S6201), and if it is determined that a detection signal is output from the second start port switch 2109, the second start port It is determined that the game ball is received in 2102 (hereinafter also referred to as “start winning prize”) (the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied), and the following step S6202 is executed. In this step S6202, the main control program obtains various random values for the second special symbol lottery (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.) triggered by the start winning.

  In addition, this main control program is combined with the jackpot determination random number etc. in response to the start winning prize, and instead of acquiring the jackpot game mode determination random value (for example, the round number determination random number value), that is, the big prize opening 2103 Before the release mode is determined, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the stop symbol are first determined to advance the game. Although the details will be described later, this main control program detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after displaying a special symbol stop symbol after a predetermined fluctuation time. In response to this, a random value for determining the jackpot game mode is acquired.

  At the same time, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes a second start hold storage process and a hold history update process which will be described later.

  First, in the second start hold storage process, the main control program acquires start storage information (a jackpot determination random number value, a jackpot symbol random number value, etc. acquired when a game ball is received in the second start port 2102) ) Are stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM), for example, in a second start storage information storage area which is a part of the main control RAM, in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension (step S6203). That is, for the second special symbol, the main control program stores at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is not yet satisfied for each special symbol type. The predetermined start number is stored in the second start storage information storage area (start storage information storage means, second start storage information storage means) of the main control RAM in such a manner that the order can be specified. Therefore, the main control program reads the second start memory information even when a new game ball is received in the second start port 2102, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (when the start prize is received). If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start port winning command indicating that the game ball has been received in the second start port 2102 in the transmission information storage area, and in the command transmission process described above, the start port The winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new second start memory information is stored in the second start memory information storage area (that is, the number of second start memory information of the second special symbol is increased). Then, it is determined whether or not the following preceding determination condition is satisfied (preceding condition determination lottery means). As the preceding determination condition, any one or any of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number 1 storage area and variation type random number storage area It is possible to exemplify that the random number value stored in the combination is read, and the read random number value matches the pre-read determination value for the second special symbol stored in the main control ROM described above (hereinafter, This is called “advance judgment lottery”).

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the second special symbol prefetch determination value, while the read random number value is the second special symbol. If the pre-read determination value does not match, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute the advance determination command transmission process to be described later when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, and the following advance determination command transmission process when the preceding determination condition is satisfied. Execute.

  In the preceding determination command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command instructing that the preceding determination effect should be started for the second special symbol in the transmission information storage area. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following prefetch information in the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command includes, for example, a special symbol 2 type prefetch command, a special symbol 2 variation pattern prefetch command, a special symbol 2 variation type prefetch command, and a special symbol 2 variation distribution table information prefetch command. , Or any one of these or any combination thereof, and includes pre-read information to be described later. This prefetch information includes information regarding the symbol type, variation pattern number, variation type number of the second special symbol, and variation distribution table information.

  This special symbol 2 type prefetch command includes information regarding the symbol type of the second special symbol. The symbol type here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a small hit, or a lost symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a loss It is the information which shows either. This special symbol 2 variation pattern prefetch command includes information on the variation pattern number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 variation type look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation type number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes the fluctuation distribution table information of the second special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program that has received the above-described special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command uses the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command, as will be described later, and will be described later. Production can be performed.

  In this embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “preceding”) from this transition point. The notification that the above-described preceding determination condition has been satisfied is suppressed over the “determination suppression range” (predetermined determination suppression means). In other words, the main control program reads the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the preceding determination suppression range after the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state in this way. Writing of (preceding judgment instruction command) is restricted. Thereby, it is suppressed that the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process described above (see FIG. 74).

  On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the main control RAM (step S6204). Further, in this pending history update process, the main control program has a start condition corresponding to the at least one start memory information stored in the first or second start memory information storage area in the lower special symbol memory display 1187. In a mode in which the at least one first or second start memory information can be specified over the period until it is established, the upper special symbol memory display 1184 or the lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a hold display mode (for example, lighting, Blinking or extinguishing), and then the start condition corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized among the at least one first or second start storage information stored by the first or second start storage information storage means As a result, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the priority start storage information is stopped and the first or second start is started. From 憶 information storage area erasing start memory information to be the first (pending digestion control means).

[Entering a game ball into the first starting port]
On the other hand, if the detection signal is not output from the second start port switch 2109 in step S6201, or if the value of the second hold number counter is 4 that is the upper limit value in the process of step S202, the main control program Determines whether a detection signal is output from the first start port switch 3022 (step S6205). When a detection signal is output from the first start port switch 3022, the main control program determines that a game ball has been received at the first start port 2101 (hereinafter also referred to as “start winning prize”) (first special symbol). In step S6206, the following step S6206 is executed. In this step S6206, the main control program obtains various random values for the first special symbol lottery (such as jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, etc.) triggered by the start winning, and the above-mentioned start storage information storage area The number of first start storage information (corresponding to the various random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area (hereinafter also referred to as “first hold number counter”) is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the first hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes the following first start hold storage process and hold history update process.

  In the first start hold storage process, the main control program uses start memory information (such as a jackpot determination random number value, a jackpot symbol random value, etc.) acquired when a game ball is received in the first start port 2101 as a special For example, a predetermined storage area (RAM) is stored in a first start storage information storage area that is a part of the main control RAM while being associated with the symbol type and the order of holding (step S6207). That is, for the first special symbol, the main control program stores at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is not yet satisfied for the first special symbol, and the order in which the start condition is satisfied for each special symbol. Are stored in the first start memory information storage area (start memory information storage means, first start memory information storage means) up to a predetermined number. Therefore, the main control program stores all the first start memory information when a new game ball is received by the first start port 2101, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (at the time of start winning). If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start opening prize command indicating that a game ball has been received in the first start opening 2101 in the transmission information storage area, and starts start winning prize in the command transmission process described above. The command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. In this manner, the peripheral control board 4140 can execute the advance determination effect described later using the start opening prize command.

  Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new first start memory information is stored in the first start memory information storage area (that is, the number of first start memory information of the first special symbol has increased). Then, it is determined whether or not the following preceding determination condition is satisfied. As the preceding determination condition, for example, one of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number storage area 1 and variation type random number storage area or It can be mentioned that the random number value stored in any combination is read and the read random number value matches the first special symbol prefetch determination value stored in the main control ROM described above ( Hereinafter referred to as “advance determination lottery”).

  By the way, as the above-described advance determination process, the main control program executes the advance determination lottery based on the game information determined based on any of the predetermined random numbers as described above, and the lottery result is displayed. In addition, it is configured so that it can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as a preceding determination instruction command (one of the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command and the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command) (prefetch first stage determination).

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the first special symbol prefetch determination value, while the read random number value is the first special symbol. If the pre-read determination value does not match, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute the advance determination command transmission process described later when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, and transmits the following advance determination command when the preceding determination condition is satisfied. Execute the process.

  In the preceding determination command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command instructing that the preceding determination effect should be started for the first special symbol in the transmission information storage area. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following prefetch information in the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command includes, for example, a special symbol 1 type prefetch command, a special symbol 1 variation pattern prefetch command, a special symbol 1 variation type prefetch command, and a special symbol 1 variation distribution table information prefetch command. , Or any one of these or any combination thereof, and includes pre-read information to be described later. This prefetch information includes the symbol type of the first special symbol, the variation pattern number, the variation type number, and the variation distribution table information.

  This special symbol 1 type prefetch command includes information related to the symbol type of the first special symbol. The symbol type here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a small hit, or a lost symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a loss It is the information which shows either. This special symbol 1 variation pattern look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation pattern number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 variation type look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation type number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes the fluctuation distribution table information of the first special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program that has received the above-described special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command uses the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command, as will be described later, to make a preceding determination described later. Production can be performed.

  In this peripheral control board 4140, the big hit expectation indicated by the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command indicates whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the pre-reading display effect based on the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command. Execution is determined according to the ratio. The pre-reading effect is a continuous effect across a plurality of variations, but whether or not to perform this pre-reading effect is determined based on the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command transmitted at the time of winning the start opening, and at that timing In addition to determining a display mode from a plurality of display modes of effects that are continuously performed, a display mode that changes across a plurality of variations is also determined (a scenario is determined in advance).

  As the display mode, based on the result of the preceding determination process, the production starts immediately, and on the basis of the result of the preceding determination process, if the change is in progress, the execution is waited for execution and the next variation It is possible to exemplify the case where a continuous production starts with the start. Furthermore, even if it is determined that such a continuous production is to be started, the display mode includes a mode that does not change at all from the state before the continuous production is started (for example, a normal display mode) Normal display mode, red specific display mode, gold special display mode). Moreover, although such a continuous effect changes in steps, the expectation to the big hit with the next display mode with respect to the previous display mode may be the same, or the display mode is increased. There may be. Furthermore, a display mode in which the degree of expectation for jackpots is reduced may be executed. In that case, the big hit expectation may be actually higher than the display mode in which the expectation rises step by step (that is, it corresponds to “broken law”). In addition, as the final form of the continuous notice, there is an aspect in which the player can discriminate the information represented by the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command, for example, jackpot confirmation, probability variation confirmation (transition confirmation to the probability variation state), and there is a ball A mode such as confirmation may be used.

  By the way, in this embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter “ The notification that the above-described preceding determination condition is satisfied is suppressed (preceding determination suppression means) over the “preceding determination suppression range”). That is, the main control program reads the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the preceding determination suppression range after the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state in this way. By suppressing the writing and setting of the (preceding determination instruction command), it is possible to suppress the transmission of the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command in the command transmission process described above (see FIG. 74). Here, “suppression” indicates not only reducing the frequency but also regulating.

  On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM (corresponding to the startup storage information storage area) (step S6208). Further, in this pending history update process, the main control program waits until the start condition corresponding to the at least one start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area is satisfied in the upper special symbol storage display 1184. The at least one start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area is derived by deriving a hold display mode (for example, lighting, blinking, or extinguishing) in a mode capable of specifying the at least one start memory information When the start condition corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized is satisfied, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized is stopped and the priority should be given from the start storage information storage area. The start memory information is erased (holding digestion control means).

  On the other hand, the main control program reaches 4 when the game ball is not accepted at the first start port 2101 in step S6205 or when the counter value of the first hold number counter reaches the upper limit value in the process of step S6206. If yes, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

[Variation start processing]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation start process shown in FIG.
In this variation start process (step S6130), the main control program first determines whether or not the values of the two reserved number counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both 0 (step S6301). . Here, the value of the number-of-holds counter of the first special symbol indicates the number of first start storage information (random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area in the start storage information storage area described above. The value of the second special symbol holding number counter indicates the number of second starting storage information (random value) stored in the second starting storage information storage area in the above-described starting storage information storage area. . If the main control program determines in step S301 described above that the value of the number-of-holds counter for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0, the start conditions for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both After determining that it has not been established and ending this variation starting process and ending the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms as described above. Note that the variation start process is the same as the preceding determination process, so that the same result is obtained at the start of variation and the preceding determination as the determination result, and the result may be used as a prefetch effect command.

  On the other hand, if the main control program determines in step S6301 that the value of the number-of-holds counter for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not 0, the start condition is set for at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is determined that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and it is determined that the engine is in a so-called start suspension state. Next, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the number-of-holds counter of the second special symbol is 0, that is, whether or not the number of second start storage information is 0 (step S6302).

  If it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second start memory information is not zero, the main control program acquires the second start memory information (second special symbol random number value) (step S6303), and then the second start described above. A predetermined number of second start storage information stored in the storage information storage area is shifted and stored (step S6304). More specifically, the main control program stores the second start storage information (random value) stored in the n th storage area (n is a natural number of 2 or more) obtained by dividing the second start storage information storage area into a plurality. Are shifted and stored in the (n-1) th storage area. Thereby, at least a storage area is vacant, and new start-up storage information of the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the vacancy occurs. At the same time, the main control program sets “1” to the special symbol variation flag (step S6305), and subtracts 1 from the value of the second special symbol holding number counter, that is, the number of second start memory information (step S6305). S6306). At the same time, the main control program controls the lighting of the lower special symbol memory display 1187 so as to indicate the number of second start memorized information after the subtraction (the number of second special symbols held). Note that the special symbol variation flag set to 1 in this way is reset when the processing flag is updated to 0 after the variation start processing is completed, for example.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second startup storage information is 0, the main control program acquires the first startup storage information (first special symbol random number value) (step S6307) and then described above. A predetermined number of first start memory information stored in the first start memory information storage area is shifted and stored (step S6308). Specifically, each of the first start storage information storage area and the second start storage information storage area is provided with four storage areas (first to fourth sections). In each of these storage areas, a jackpot determination random number storage area in which the jackpot determination random number value is stored, a jackpot symbol random number storage area in which the jackpot symbol random number value is stored, and a reach determination random number value. A random number storage area for reach determination to be stored, and a random pattern for random pattern 1, 2 storage area for storing variable display pattern random values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, are provided.

  The main control program stores the second start storage information (random number) stored in the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area divided into a plurality of the first start storage information storage areas. Shift to the storage area. As a result, at least a storage area becomes empty, and new start-up storage information of the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the empty has occurred. At the same time, the main control program sets “2” to the special symbol variation flag (step S6309), and subtracts “1” from the value of the first special symbol hold number counter, that is, the number of the second start memory information. (Step S6310). In addition, the main control program controls the lighting of the upper special symbol memory display 1184 so as to indicate the number of first start memory information after the subtraction (the number of first special symbols held). The special symbol variation flag set to “2” in this way is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing ends.

  As described above, for the determination at the start of fluctuation, the same determination process as that for prefetching is performed. By repeating the processing and executing it, it becomes possible to obtain the same result as in the prefetch determination. Even if the game process is determined by executing the same process at the time of starting winning and at the start of variation, the pre-read command (special symbol storage pre-reading effect command) and the command at the start of variation are different from each other. In order to identify each other, the same command value is not used.

  Next, the main control program confirms the contents of the jackpot flag and determines whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (step S6312). When the gaming state is not the probability variation state, the main control program selects the probability variation function non-operation jackpot determination table set with a low probability of jackpot (step S6313). On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the main control program selects a probability variation function activation determination table set with a high probability of winning a jackpot (step S6314).

  Next, based on the selected table, the main control program receives the first special symbol random value or the second special symbol random value (hereinafter also referred to as “big hit determination random number”) acquired in step S6303 or step S6307 as a jackpot. It is determined whether or not the value (random number corresponding to jackpot) matches (step S6315). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied (lottery means). If it matches the jackpot value, the main control program is the jackpot of the jackpot type based on the jackpot determination random value, that is, the type that activates at least one of the probability variation function and the time-shortening function (status type related to the gaming state) This is determined (step S6316). Next, the main control program sets a jackpot flag corresponding to the determined jackpot type to ON (step S6317). On the other hand, if the jackpot determination random number obtained in step S6315 does not match the jackpot value, the main control program executes step S6318 described later. Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 1 (step S6318).

[Variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.
First, the main control program determines which jackpot flag is ON (step S6401). When it is determined that any of the jackpot flags is ON, the main control program executes a jackpot variation pattern table setting process (step S6402). In this jackpot variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern table for winning a jackpot (a jackpot variation pattern table as a variation pattern table at the time of winning) is set, and if the winning conditions are satisfied, the variation for winning the jackpot A pattern (variation pattern at the time of winning) is determined (variation pattern setting means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program functions as a reach lottery means and has been stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM and the start condition is satisfied. Reach condition as a condition for executing an effect (reach effect) implying that a predetermined winning condition may be established for stored information, that is, a special lottery may be won, or this reach It is determined whether or not a specific reach condition is satisfied among the conditions (step S6403). Note that the reach condition here means that it is relatively unlikely that the winning condition is satisfied, and it is easy for the player to hold the expectation of winning the special lottery relatively easily. Normal reach as an example, and a specific aspect of reach production that makes it relatively easy for players to hold the expectation of winning a special lottery with a relatively high probability of winning This is a condition for executing any one of the super-reach as an example. On the other hand, the specific reach condition described above is a condition for executing this super reach. Hereinafter, such determination is also referred to as “reach lottery”.

  By the way, the main control program stores the winning probability of such reach lottery, that is, the probability that the reach condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as “reach lottery winning probability”) in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Control is performed so as to change in stages according to the number of already-started storage information. Specifically, the main control program, when the winning probability of the reach lottery is, for example, when it is 0, 1/15 or 1 according to the number of stored start storage information (so-called holding number) Is controlled so that 1/14, 2 is 1/13, 3 is 1/10, and 4 is 1/10.

  Further, the main control program writes the reach lottery result command including the result of the aforementioned reach lottery into the transmission information storage area of the aforementioned main control built-in RAM and transmits it in the aforementioned command transmission process (random number range information control means ). That is, the main control program corresponds to each start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, instead of transmitting the determination reach random number value itself to the peripheral control board 4140. And a reach lottery result command related to the result of the reach lottery. The reach lottery result command includes a first special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to start memory information related to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reach lottery result command corresponding to start memory information related to the second special symbol. Is a command name generically.

  When it is determined that the reach condition described above is satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the main control program executes a reach loss variation pattern table setting process (step S6404). In this reach-losing variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (reach-losing variation pattern table) for executing a reach effect to make a loss.

  At this time, the main control program determines whether or not the time reduction function is operating. When the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is activated (time reduction), the main control program performs the above-described reach effect and causes a loss. A variation pattern table including a pattern (time-short non-winning variation pattern) (time-short reach-losing variation pattern table as a time-short non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means). On the other hand, if the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is not activated (non-time reduction), the main control program executes the reach effect described above and A variation pattern table (a non-temporal non-temporal reach variation variation pattern table as a non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means) including a variation pattern (non-temporal non-winning variation pattern) In the following description, the short-time reach loss variation pattern table and the non-short-time reach loss variation pattern table are also collectively referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern table”. In the present embodiment, the main control program has not only “big hit”, “small hit” and “losing” as the lottery result of the lottery on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols, but also this “losing” is activated by the time shortening function. It is also controlled separately whether it is a “non-short-time loss” as a “lack” in a state where the time-shortening function is not performed or a “short-time loss” in a state where the time-shortening function is activated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6403 that the reach condition is not satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is not executed, the main control program executes a non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process (step S6405). In this non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (non-reach loss variation pattern table) that is lost without executing the reach effect. A non-reach loss variation pattern table is prepared in correspondence with a plurality of gaming states, and a plurality of types are prepared. For example, in a normal gaming state, a table in which a shortening variation is easily performed when the number of holdings is a predetermined value or more. It has become.

  Even when it is determined that the reach condition is not satisfied, the main control program similarly determines whether or not the time reduction function is operating, and similarly to the above, whether or not the time reduction function is operating. The variation pattern table to be set may be changed according to the above. In other words, the main control program loses the game without executing the reach effect described above when it is determined that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is activated (time reduction). For this purpose, a fluctuation pattern table (time-short non-reach fluctuation pattern table as a time-short non-winning fluctuation pattern table) including a fluctuation pattern (time-short non-winning fluctuation pattern table) is set (fluctuation pattern setting means). On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is not activated (non-time reduction), the main control program loses without executing the reach effect described above. A variation pattern table (a non-temporal non-reach loss variation pattern table as a non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means).

  The main control program (variation pattern setting means) determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the table set as described above (step S6410), the pattern command and the winning information of the variation pattern of the special symbol thus determined. The command is written and set in the transmission information storage area (step S6411). Hereinafter, these pattern commands and winning information commands are collectively referred to as “variation pattern commands”. The pattern command of the variation pattern includes information regarding the variation time of the special symbol, and the winning information command includes a winning result regarding the jackpot.

  Furthermore, the main control program sets the value of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the variation pattern table set as described above in the timer (step S6412). That is, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a jackpot variation pattern table, the main control program determines the jackpot variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the jackpot variation pattern table. To the timer. On the other hand, the main control program, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a small hit variation pattern table, according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on this small hit variation pattern table, Set the variable time for the timer.

  Further, the main control program, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a short-time reach loss variation pattern table, according to the special symbol variation pattern determined based on the short-time reach loss variation pattern table, Set the time change variable for the timer to the timer. On the other hand, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a non-temporal reach reach variation variation pattern table, the main control program responds to the special symbol variation pattern determined based on the non-temporal reach reach variation variation pattern table. Then, the variable time for non-short-time reach is set in the timer. As described above, even when the lottery result of the special lottery is “losing”, the variation time of the special symbol is made different depending on whether or not the time reduction function is activated.

  Here, the main control program manages the basic variation time and the addition variation time as 2-byte data as the variation time of such a special symbol, and the maximum variation time that is the total value of these times is set. 262.144 s (65536 × 4 ms) × 2 = 524.288 s, and a special symbol variation time twice as long as before, in which each time is managed by 1 byte, is realized.

  When the value of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as described above is set in the timer, the main control program next sets the special symbol LED operation flag to ON (step S6413). When the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON, the main control program is specified based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above when the start condition is satisfied. At least one of the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) is caused to start a variable display composed of a plurality of LED lighting patterns according to the determined variation pattern. (Design variation control means). Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 2 (step S6414) and ends the variation pattern setting process as described above.

  Thus, when set in the variation pattern setting process, the main control program receives the pattern command and winning information command already written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. Read out and transmit to the peripheral control unit 4140.

[In-flight processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process shown in FIG.
First, the main control program determines whether or not the variation time set in the timer in the above-described step S6412 (see FIG. 100) has expired (step S6501), and the variation time set in the timer is timed. If it is not up, the changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time set in the timer has expired, the main control program sets the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the above-described step S413 to OFF (step S6502). Then, the main control program, according to the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above, the first special symbol indicator 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol indicator 1186 (variable display). Means) is used to stop the change display (variation of special symbols) consisting of a change pattern of the lighting, extinction or blinking mode of the 7-segment LED, and the stop mode according to the established conditions described above. A stop symbol consisting of is displayed (design variation control means). In other words, the main control program starts the special symbol variation display when the start condition is met after the start condition is met, and then the winning condition is determined when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed. A stop symbol corresponding to the result is displayed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program writes and sets a fixed stop command in the transmission information storage area described above (step S6503). This fixed stop command is a command indicating that the change of the special symbol is finished and the predetermined stop symbol is fixed. The main control program reads the fixed stop command from the transmission information storage area and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. Thereby, the peripheral control board 4140 can recognize that the stop symbol of the special symbol that has been variably displayed has been determined.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S6504). When it is determined that the big hit flag is ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 3 (step S505) and ends the changing process.

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, when the game ball is received at the start port and the start condition is satisfied, there is no start memory information (hereinafter also referred to as a holding ball) in which the start condition has been satisfied before that. A special symbol variation display is started, and a stop symbol is displayed when a predetermined variation time has elapsed. At the same time, in such a general gaming machine, after the start condition is established, a special lottery is subsequently executed. See first reference above). In this way, when the gaming state transitions, for example, the game content associated with the stored ball that has been stored before the transition of the gaming state may be executed after the transition of the gaming state. It seems that there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the processing flag is updated to 3 (that is, triggered by the transition of the gaming state, for example), it is determined that the main control program is to be transferred next. After writing a command representing the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “transfer destination command”) to the transmission information storage area, the main control program then transfers the transfer destination command to the peripheral control board 4140 in command transmission processing (S92). Send to. As will be described later, the main control program keeps the gaming state in the normal gaming state if the winning condition is not satisfied, but if the winning condition is satisfied, the main control program responds to the established winning condition from the normal gaming state. The game state is shifted to a more advantageous game state, and thereafter, the game state is changed back to the normal game state (game state control means). Therefore, the main control program transmits a transfer destination command indicating that the game state has been changed to the predetermined game state to the peripheral control board 4140 when the game state has been changed (post-migration game state notification means). . On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 4140, based on the transfer destination command received from the main control board 4100, the transferred game state is taken into consideration, and it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to the difference in the game state before and after the transfer. Control the production operation.

  Normally, in the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4150a normally executes the rendering operation without being subjected to special restrictions from the main control board 4100 when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied.

  As a first example for making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a transfer destination command from the main control board 4100, it indicates that the game state has shifted based on the transfer destination command. Since it can be ascertained reliably, for example, the execution of performance operations such as the preceding determination effect and the reach effect described above is restricted by the control on the main control board 4100 side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the rendering operation to give the player a sense of incongruity due to the difference in the gaming state before and after the transition.

  On the other hand, as a second example for making it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, the peripheral control board 4140 uses, for example, a start condition based on the transfer destination command received by the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the main control board 4100. If the gaming state at the first time point when the starting condition is satisfied is different from the gaming state at the second time point when the starting condition is satisfied with respect to the starting memory information that is established, the effect operation is performed in consideration of the shifted gaming state. You may make it control.

  In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the transfer destination command later, when the gaming state is transferred, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can immediately grasp that the gaming state has been transferred, and thus shifts. It is possible to control the production operation so that the game content linked to the game state does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. The peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the transfer destination command from the main control board 4100 and, for example, when it is determined that the next game state is a probabilistic change and a short-time state, a predetermined winning condition regarding the stored start memory information is stored. If it is not the winning type that activates the probability variation function (ie, if it is a so-called normal jackpot), the preceding determination effect is applied to the subsequent starting storage information stored subsequent to the previous starting storage information. You may make it regulate so that it may not perform.

  By the way, the state where the processing flag is 3 indicates that the special symbol variation display is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot is won. Although not shown in the flowchart, 0 is set as an initial value to a situation identification flag for identifying a gaming state in a jackpot game preparation process to be described later together with the process of updating the process flag to 3 in step S6505.

  The main control program was established using the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) or the second special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) corresponding to the special symbols that were variably displayed as described above. A stop symbol corresponding to the winning condition is displayed (stop symbol control means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6504 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 0 (step S6508) and ends the changing process. In this case, since the main control program is not accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, the main control program restricts writing of the transition destination command to the transmission information storage area. Note that the processing flag of 0 indicates that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped as shown that the jackpot is not won.

[Big jackpot game preparation processing]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG.
First, the main control program determines whether or not the status identification flag is 0 (step S6621). Note that the value of the status identification flag is set to 0 when the processing flag is updated to 3, as described above.

  As described above, this situation identification flag is a flag for identifying the gaming state in the jackpot game preparation process. For example, a situation identification flag of 0 means initial setting, a situation identification flag of 1 means that an explanation interval effect is being performed, and a situation identification flag of 2 means that It means that the game mode determination process is being performed, and that the situation identification flag is 3 means that the jackpot start interval effect is being performed.

  When the jackpot game preparation process is executed first, as a result of setting the situation identification flag to 0, the main control program writes and sets the explanation interval effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6622). The main control program transmits the explanation interval effect command set in this way to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the timer interrupt process executed around every 4 ms in the command transmission process described above. Next, the main control program sets the explanation interval effect timer (step S6623), then sets 1 to the situation identification flag (step S6624), and ends the jackpot game preparation process. The timer value set in the explanation interval effect timer is decremented by 1 in the timer subtraction process which is a part of the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms by the main control program.

  Here, the explanation interval effect mentioned above means that when a display effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the big hit is not a big hit of a specific type ( In other words, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 explains the game procedure until the jackpot game is actually started (when it is a normal type jackpot). When the jackpot is a specific type of jackpot, the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with a display effect that the 16-round jackpot game is executed in addition to the display effect that the jackpot is won.

  By the way, the next processing cycle of the jackpot game preparation processing is 4 ms later. If the processing flag is 3 and the situation identification flag is set to 1, as a result of determining in step S621 that the situation identification flag is not 0, the main control program determines whether or not the situation identification flag is 1. Is determined (step S6625). In this case, since the situation identification flag is set to 1, the main control program determines whether or not the explanation interval effect has timed up (step S6626). If the explanation interval effect has not timed up, the main control program ends the jackpot game preparation process. Hereinafter, until the explanation interval effect times out, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and YES in step S6625 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 1 of the situation identification flag. The processing routine for determining NO in step S6626 is repeatedly executed.

  When the explanation interval effect timer expires in step S6626, the main control program starts the operation of the condition device assuming that the explanation interval effect has ended (step S6627). Next, the main control program determines whether or not the time reduction function is activated (step S6628). If the time reduction function is activated, the operation of the time reduction function is stopped (step S6629).

  On the other hand, when the time reduction function is not activated, the main control program writes and sets the gate effective effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6636). The main control program reads the gate effective effect command from the transmission information storage area and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process which is a part of the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. The peripheral control unit 4140 can recognize that the execution of the gate effective effect described later is permitted with the reception of the gate effective effect command. Furthermore, the main control program sets 2 to the situation identification flag (step S6630), and ends the jackpot game preparation process as described above.

  Here, the gate effective effect means that the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 are enabled after the above-described explanation interval effect is completed (by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R). This is an effect display for informing the player by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that the detection of the game ball has been validated. Although details will be described later, as this gate effective effect, for example, a display prompting the player to select which type of jackpot game shown in FIG. 78 described later is executed, or as shown in FIG. 79 described later. The display indicating that the current timing is a harassment type timing, or the display indicating that the current timing is a pounding type timing as shown in FIG.

  As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when winning in the jackpot lottery, the start timing of the jackpot game can be freely determined by the player's intention. That is, the peripheral control unit 4140 that has received the gate effective effect command displays a display screen (see FIG. 78) indicating that the effect control program prompts the player to select which type of jackpot game to execute. After displaying on the side liquid crystal display device 1900, or while displaying the display screen, it may be displayed that it is possible to take a break before the big hit game.

  On the other hand, as a result of setting the above-described processing flag to 3 and setting the status identification flag to 2, in the jackpot game preparation process of the next cycle, the main control program determines NO in step S6621, and NO in step S6625. Determination is made, the process proceeds to step S6631, and it is determined whether or not the value of the status identification flag is 2 (step S6631). In this case, since 2 is set in the situation identification flag, the main control program determines YES in step S6631 and performs the following jackpot game state determination process (step S6632).

[Big hit game mode decision processing]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state determination process shown in FIG. 97, and FIG. 104 is an example of a table used in the jackpot game state determination process.

  In the jackpot gaming mode determination process, the main control program is for determining the jackpot gaming mode when triggered by the distribution detection sensor 2580L detecting the passage of the game ball to the left gate or the allocation detection sensor 2580R of the game ball passing through the right gate. Get a random value (random number for round number determination). The main control program includes the acquired jackpot game mode determining random value (round number determining random value), the type of jackpot flag in a flag ON state (a specific type jackpot flag or a normal type jackpot flag), The execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined based on whether the passed gate is left or right.

  In this jackpot game mode determination process, the main control program first determines whether or not the delay of the game ball is detected by the irregular delay side detection sensor, that is, the game ball passes through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creation means 2586. It is determined whether or not (step S6071). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586, the main control program determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R by the distribution detection sensor 2580R (step S1). S6072).

  When a game ball is detected with a delay in step S6071, the main control program does not determine whether or not the distribution detection sensor 2580L has detected even if the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L. That is, when a game ball is detected in delay in step S6071, the main control program invalidates the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L.

  In step S6072, if the distribution detection sensor 2580R does not detect that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R, the main control program ends the jackpot game state determination process and ends the jackpot game preparation process. Return to the interrupt process and execute it.

  Hereinafter, until a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 2 of the situation identification flag, and determines NO in step S625. It determines, and it determines with YES in step S6631, and in a jackpot game mode determination process, it determines with YES in step S6071 and repeats the process routine determined with NO in step S6072.

  On the other hand, when the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R in step S6072, the main control program determines that the big hit flag in the flag ON state, that is, the big hit flag turned on in step S6317 is a specific type. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit flag (step S6073). If the specific type of jackpot flag is ON in step S6073, the main control program determines the jackpot game mode with reference to the right gate 2575R of the table B shown in FIG. 104 (step S6074). That is, the main control program sets the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) or the second special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) after the variation time has elapsed after the start condition is established for the current start storage information. The stop symbol corresponding to the established winning condition is displayed and if the winning condition is satisfied, then, as will be described later, the normal gaming state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state corresponding to the established winning condition. (Game state control means) For example, the main control program shifts to the first special game state when the established winning condition is the first winning condition, while the second special condition when the established winning condition is the second winning condition. Transition to the gaming state (gaming state control means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6073 that the specific type jackpot flag is not ON (that is, the normal type jackpot flag is ON), the main control program refers to the right gate 2575R of table A in FIG. Is determined (step S6075).

  Here, as can be seen by referring to the table A in FIG. 104, when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L. Is passed (when a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out during the jackpot game is the same, although the mode of the jackpot game executed is different ( They do not have to be exactly the same as long as they do not impair gameplay).

  Further, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the main control program sets the 6-round jackpot game and the 12-round jackpot game to 50% each. The probability is determined. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the main control program sets 50% each of the 2 round jackpot game and the 16 round jackpot game. The probability is determined.

  If the delay is not detected in step S6071, that is, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586, the main control program uses the distribution detection sensor 2580L to move the game ball to the left. It is determined whether or not the gate 2575L has been passed (step S6076).

  If it is not detected in step S6076 that the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L, that is, if no game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines NO in step S6076 and determines the big hit game mode. The process exits from the process and returns to the jackpot game preparation process, and further executes the jackpot game preparation process, and executes a timer interrupt process every 4 ms.

  Hereinafter, until the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 2 of the situation identification flag, and determines NO in step S6625. It determines, and it determines with YES in step S6631, and in a jackpot game mode determination process, it determines NO in step S6071 and repeats the process routine determined to be NO in step S6076.

  On the other hand, when the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L in step S6076, that is, when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program reads the big hit flag in the flag ON state, that is, in step S6317. It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag that has been turned ON is a specific type of jackpot flag (step S6077). If the specific type of jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S6077), the main control program determines the jackpot game mode with reference to the left gate 2575L of table B shown in FIG. 104 (step S6078).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6077 that the specific type jackpot flag is not ON (that is, the normal type jackpot flag is ON), the main control program refers to the left gate 2575L of Table A and executes the jackpot game. A mode (the number of rounds in the present embodiment) is determined (step S6079).

  When the execution mode of the jackpot game (the number of rounds in the present embodiment) is determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078 or step S6079, the main control program starts the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (step S6080). . Next, the main control program determines whether or not the probability changing function is in operation when the accessory continuous operation device is operated (step S6081).

  If it is determined in step S6081 that the probability variation function is in operation, the main control program stops the probability variation function in step S6082, and executes step S6083 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6081 that the probability variation function is not operating, the main control program directly executes step S6083 while skipping step S6082.

  In step S6083, the main control program sets the operation mode of the big prize opening 2103 based on the jackpot game mode determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078 and step S6079 (step S6083).

  The operation mode of the big prize opening 2103 is, for example, the maximum number of round games in which the big prize opening 2103 is repeatedly opened in the jackpot game, and a game ball can enter the big prize opening 2103 in each round game. The opening mode of the big prize opening 2103 in the big hit game, such as the upper limit number (for example, nine) to be taken and the opening / closing operation restriction time of the opening / closing members 2106A and 2106B in each round game, is set.

  Next, the main control program is a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started, a round information command indicating the determined number of rounds, and the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game is already being performed. A flag, etc. are set (step S6084).

  Although the details will be described later, the main control program transmits the jackpot start command and the round information command set in this way to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (see FIG. 240), respectively. In the board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the jackpot game can be selectively executed as an effect associated with the determined round number through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side. become.

  Thus, even if the explanation interval effect timer has timed out, the main control program does not detect the passing of the game ball to the gate 2575 (the left gate 2575L, the right gate 2575R), The progress is stopped and the next process is not executed in the jackpot game mode determination process. That is, even if it is determined that the jackpot is determined in the processing of step S6315 and the condition device is activated (step S6604), the main control program does not proceed with the jackpot game as it is, but instead the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate Until the passing of the game ball to 2575R) is detected (steps S6072 and S6076), the big hit game is stopped.

  As described above, here, if the player who touches the display screen of FIG. 76 or 77 does not drive the game ball into the distribution unit 2550 (right-handed) by the player's intention, the jackpot game Will not be started, so it is easy to immediately notice that the player can take a break before the jackpot game starts, and make the player recognize the content of the message more reliably be able to. Further, as a display timing, when the player is enthusiastic about the game, the game can be temporarily interrupted by the player's intention, and a break can be taken in this state or the player can go to the toilet.

  Thereafter, when the game ball is fired to the sorting unit 2550 by the player's intention, the main control program detects the game ball by the sorting sensor 2580L or the sorting sensor 2580R, and based on this, the jackpot game Is canceled in step S6072, or YES is determined in step S6076, and one of step S6074, step S6075, step S6078, and step S6079 is executed, thereby achieving a big hit The execution mode (number of rounds) of the game can be determined, and the jackpot game in the determined execution mode can be started. Thereby, the start timing of the jackpot game can be freely determined by the player's intention, and the moment of starting the jackpot game is not overlooked, so that the player's interest in the game can be prevented from being impaired.

  Next, the main control program sets the jackpot start interval effect command (step S6085), sets the jackpot start interval effect timer to, for example, 8 seconds (step S6086), and sets 3 to the situation identification flag (step S6087). ), The jackpot game mode determination process is ended and the process returns to the jackpot game preparation process and is executed. Further, the jackpot game preparation process is ended and a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms. The jackpot start interval effect is a display effect that is performed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from when the accessory continuous operation device is activated until the opening and closing of the opening and closing device 2106 is started. This is a display effect or the like indicating that the jackpot game is started.

  The jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process described above. Thereby, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect display indicating that the big hit game is started is performed through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  By the way, according to steps S6621 to S6629, the main control program continuously operates the time-saving function until the explanation interval effect time elapses in a series of lottery processes for execution of the jackpot game. In other words, despite the fact that the big win is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the time reduction function is activated by deferring the start of the condition device while the explanation interval effect is being performed. In this case, during the execution of the explanation interval effect, the entry of the game ball into the second start port 2102 is facilitated.

  When the jackpot game mode determination process described above is completed, the processing flag is 3, and as a result of setting the status identification flag to 3, in the jackpot game preparation process of the next period of 4 ms, the main control program determines NO in step S6621. It determines, and it determines with NO in step S6625, determines with NO in step S6631, moves to step S6633, and determines whether or not the jackpot start interval effect set in step S6084 has timed up (step S633).

  If the jackpot start interval effect has not timed up, the main control program determines NO in step S6633, hunts the jackpot game preparation process, and returns to the timer interruption process routine to execute it. Hereinafter, until the jackpot start interval effect times out, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and determines YES in step S625 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 3 of the situation identification flag. The processing routine for determining NO in step S6626 is repeatedly executed.

  When the jackpot start interval effect is timed up, the main control program determines YES in step S633 and updates the processing flag to “4” assuming that the jackpot start interval effect has ended (step S6634). Next, the main control program sets the status identification flag to 0 and returns it to the initial value (step S 6635), ends the jackpot game preparation process, and returns to the timer interrupt process routine for execution.

[Big hit game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S6220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

  In the jackpot game process described above, the main control program first determines whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is open (step S6801). When the big prize opening 2103 is being opened, the main control program determines whether the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2103 has reached the opening / closing operation limit time set in step S6803. Is determined (step S6802). If it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed, the main control program closes the special winning opening 2103 by closing the opening / closing members 2106A and 2106B (step S6804).

  However, even if it is determined in step S6802 that the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet elapsed, the main control program does not enter the big prize opening 2103 after the big prize opening 2103 is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, 9) set in step S6803, the process proceeds to step S6804 and the special winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, if the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed in step S6802 and the number of game balls received in the big winning opening 2103 has not yet reached the upper limit number in step S6803, the main control program The jackpot game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6801 that the big prize opening 2103 is not being opened, the main control program determines that the number of times the big prize opening 2103 is opened (number of round games) by the opening / closing members 2106A and 2106B is the above step S6803 (FIG. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds set in (103) has been reached (step S805). If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, the main control program activates the opening / closing members 2106 according to the winning conditions established as described above, and opens the corresponding big prize opening 2103 (step S6806), and the big hit game The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program confirms that the winning condition has been established by stopping the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. The state is shifted to a state in which execution of the opening / closing operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2106 executed as a condition is restricted. That is, in this case, the main control program is stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the big hit flag in, for example, step S6317 (see FIG. 99) by executing steps S6807 to S6812. Based on the winning type of the jackpot that is triggered by the execution of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set, and then the jackpot game process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program first sets the big hit flag and the big hit game flag to OFF states (step S6807). Then, the winning type of the jackpot that is triggered by the jackpot game is determined (step S6808).

  Here, in step S6808, the main control program determines whether or not the winning type that activates the probability variation function (the jackpot symbol is, for example, 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9). In other words, the main control program determines whether or not a probability change transition condition for determining whether or not a gaming state (probability variation state) in which a winning condition is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state should be established. (Winning probability control means). The main control program sets the probability change state when the probability change transition condition is satisfied, and also sets a transfer destination command in the transmission information storage area as a command indicating a game state determined to be transferred next. Write. On the other hand, the main control program makes a transition to a gaming state other than the probability variation state if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied (winning probability control means), and determines the gaming state that is determined to be transitioned next. As a command to represent, the migration destination command is written in the transmission information storage area. Thereafter, the main control program transmits the command written in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (S92).

  That is, if the main control program determines in step S6808 that the probability variation function is not selected, the main control program stops the operation of the condition device without activating both the probability variation function and the time shortening function (step S6808). S6811). On the other hand, when the main control program determines in step S6808 that it is the winning type that activates the probability variation function (so-called probability variation big hit), the main control program activates the probability variation function (step S6809). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a probability change transition condition for determining whether or not the probability variation state in which the winning condition is established is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state should be satisfied. If the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is shifted to a probability variation state that is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state, and the special symbol is displayed over a predetermined number of variation display times. While the probability variation state is continued while the variation is displayed, the state is shifted to a gaming state other than the probability variation state when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied (winning probability control means).

  Next, the main control program activates the time reduction function (step S6810), and then stops the operation of the condition device (step S6811). When the time reduction function is activated, the main control program selects each hourly time variation pattern table including a variation pattern group in which the variation time is shortened from the start of the operation to the predetermined number of variations of the special symbol. Corresponding to the length of the variation pattern determined from each hourly variation pattern table, the variation time value of the special symbol is set to the timer shorter than the prescribed variation time value (shortening function control means) . The main control program writes a transfer destination command to the transmission information storage area as a command indicating a gaming state that is determined to be transferred next, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (S92). You may make it transmit. At the same time, the main control program repeats the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2105 arranged in the vicinity of the second start port 2102 according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern until the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations is reached. The game ball flowing down in the vicinity of the pair of movable pieces 2105 is in a state where it can be easily received by the second starting port 2102. Finally, the main control program sets the processing flag to 0 (step S6812) and ends the big hit game processing.

  In this way, the main control program repeatedly opens and closes the big prize opening 2103 in the opening mode according to the winning type of the big hit until the number of rounds determined in advance in step 805 is reached. Instructed for the prize ball movement according to the number of game balls received in the special winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  Here, in a general gaming machine, the game balls launched into the game area flow down between a number of nails provided in the game area, and some of them enter the start opening or the general start opening. On the other hand, the remaining game balls are discharged out of the game area from a discharge port (so-called out port) formed at the bottom of the game area (see the first reference above). In such a gaming machine, At first glance, it is conceivable that the circulation of the game ball is unlikely to be a proper state depending on the arrangement of the actors and nails provided in the game area.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, this is solved by the following processing. First, when the winning condition is satisfied, the main control program activates at least one of the determined first special symbol indicator 1185 (variable display means) and second special symbol indicator 1186 (variable display means). Using the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern determined as described above (variation pattern at the time of win) A stop symbol corresponding to is displayed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program determines that the first special symbol indicator 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol indicator are determined when the winning condition is not satisfied and the time reduction function is activated. Using at least one of 1186 (variable display means), after controlling the change display of the special symbol in accordance with the determined time short non-winning change pattern, the change time corresponding to the short non-winning change pattern (time short non-winning) The stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery is displayed on the occasion that the variation time has elapsed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program determines that the first special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the second special symbol display are determined when the winning condition is not satisfied and the time reduction function is not activated. Using at least one of 1186 (variable display means), after controlling the change display of the special symbol according to the determined non-temporal non-winning fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time (non-short time) according to the non-temporal non-winning fluctuation pattern The stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed when the non-winning time) elapses.

  As described above, not only big hits, small hits, and losing, but also the special symbol's change time according to four types (hits, small hits, short-time lost, and non-short-time lost) of time-lapse lost and non-time-short lost Can be set, the special symbol variation time when the time reduction function is activated and the special symbol variation time when the time reduction function is not activated (non-time reduction) when the special lottery is not won. Because there is a time difference between the time and the non-winning time, the game ball can be easily discharged from the game area when one of the functions is activated according to the setting of both time. Therefore, regardless of the nail arrangement, etc., the circulation of the game balls will be good, and the performance of discharging the game balls out of the game area (so-called out performance) can be improved compared to the past. It becomes so that. Specifically, the following effects are exhibited by the following usage methods.

  First, as a first usage and effect, in the case of non-temporal loss, the special symbol is stopped at 500 ms as an example of the variation time (non-temporal non-winning variation time). If the special symbol is stopped at 1000 ms, taking the variation time (short-term non-winning variation time) as an example during the so-called right-handed game state where a game ball is launched on the right side of the game, the short-time loss is Since there is a difference in the stop time of the special 500ms symbol, about one extra game ball is fired and the game ball is easily discharged from the game area (out port located at the bottom) and the collection efficiency of the game ball ( So-called out performance) is improved.

  As a second usage and effect, for example, when it is desired to increase the number of game balls to be fired per unit time, the main control program changes the fluctuation time when the result of the special lottery is lost in the short time (non-winning in the short time) As an example, when the variation time is set to 2000 ms, when game balls are fired every 600 ms, for example, about 3 extra game balls are fired, so that the out performance is improved.

  As a third usage and effect, for example, when the payout rate of a game ball in a short time (so-called play rate) is too high, the main control program changes the special symbol of the short-time loss (change of short-time non-winning loss) By setting a longer (time), it is possible to extend the time zone in which the payout of game balls is concentrated so that the short-time payout rate does not become too high.

  By the way, the main control program may set the above-described prize ball effective range period in consideration of a detection delay until a game ball entered from the entrance of the big prize opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110. (Discharge instruction regulation means). That is, when the main control program has shifted to the first special gaming state, the opening / closing member 2106 is closed and the opening / closing member 2106 is closed after the predetermined period has elapsed. A prize ball invalid range period, which is a period excluding the prize ball valid range period until it elapses, is set (payout instruction restricting means).

  In this way, even if a game ball is held for some time in the prize winning opening 2103 or the like, it is possible to prevent the held game ball from being erroneously detected as a result of an illegal act. it can.

[15. Advance judgment processing]
The above-described effect control program analyzes a command received from the main control board 4100 and stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in the above-described received command analysis processing (command receiving means), and the command is a special symbol 1 stored command. Or, if it is a special symbol 2 storage command, the reception of this command triggers the start hold display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery for new start memory information corresponding to the special symbol 1 storage command or the special symbol 2 storage command Is led out to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) (start hold control means).

  In other words, when the received command is a special symbol memory pre-reading effect command (special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command or special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command), the effect control program reads the pre-read included in the special symbol memory pre-reading effect command. Based on the information (for example, information related to the stop symbol of the special symbol), for example, information suggesting the type of jackpot game is acquired, and based on the information, the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command or the special symbol 2 is acquired. A start-pending display mode that implies a lottery result of a special lottery corresponding to the new start-up storage information corresponding to the storage pre-reading effect command is derived to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and then corresponds to the new start-up storage information When the fluctuation time to be passed elapses, the derivation of the start hold display mode is terminated (start hold control method). ).

  Specifically, when receiving the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command or the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command, the effect control program displays the above-described start hold display mode (for example, “usually as a hold display mode in which it is difficult to expect a big hit) Special start hold display mode from the beginning or midway of the above derivation (for example, “Hatsuatsu hold display mode” is illustrated as a hold display mode that makes it very easy for a player to expect a big hit) ) Is executed, and advance determination control to be led out to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed (advance determination control means). Hereinafter, such a function is referred to as a “preceding determination control function”.

  By the way, even in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the starting hold information is already stored when the starting ball is received by the starting opening and the starting condition is satisfied, There is one that performs a so-called advance determination effect until the corresponding special symbol variable display start condition is satisfied (see the first reference). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine has means for clearly indicating that the gaming state has shifted, the gaming state shifts as follows after the start condition is established, and then the variation display of the variation pattern of the special symbol If the start condition for starting the game is satisfied, the effect mode determined in the gaming state before the transition is executed in the gaming state after the transition, and at first glance, the player feels uncomfortable. It is also possible to give

  However, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), the main control program as described above causes the preceding determination suppression range from the transition point as described above. For this reason, transmission of the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is suppressed. Therefore, the effect control program recognizes that the gaming state has shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state by receiving the above-described high probability end designation command, and then, as described above, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect Based on the suppression of the transmission of the command (preceding determination instruction command) and the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command (preceding determination instruction command), the preceding determination by the preceding determination control function as a result over the preceding determination suppression range. Control will be suppressed (advance determination suppression means).

  In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the gaming state is shifted as described above, the effect control program starts the main control built-in RAM in the previous gaming state (the probability variation state is exemplified in the present embodiment). Since the advance determination effect is not executed for the start storage information in the preceding determination suppression range among the start storage information stored in the storage information storage area, the advance determination corresponding to the stored start storage information in the preceding determination suppression range It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable regarding the production.

  As such a preceding determination suppression range, for example, the maximum number of memories that can store the start memory information in the start memory information storage area from before (or after) the timing when the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal game state It is possible to list the number of special symbol variations (for example, four times) corresponding to the start memory information of minutes (for example, four).

  In addition, as the advance determination suppression range, for example, after the game state has shifted from the probability variation state to the normal game state, the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area at the time of this transition exists. In this case, it is possible to list the number of fluctuations of the start memory information corresponding to the number of stored start memory information (for example, 1 to 4 in this embodiment).

  Further, as the preceding determination suppression range, instead of or in combination, for example, after the gaming state has shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, the starting storage stored in the starting storage information storage area at the time of this transition In the case where information exists, the number of start memory information fluctuations corresponding to the number of stored start memory information (for example, 1 to 4 in this embodiment) can be listed.

  In addition, as the advance determination suppression range, for example, after the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal game state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area immediately before the transition One display may be sufficient.

  In addition, as the preceding determination suppression range described above, instead of the above-described number of changes, for example, a time set corresponding to each of the above-described number of changes from the timing at which the gaming state transitions from the probability change state to the normal game state. There may be.

  By the way, in general gaming machines, the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable manner when the starting condition is satisfied after the starting prize is satisfied and the starting condition is satisfied, are stopped in a predetermined order. However, when the reach condition is satisfied, for example, the middle decorative symbol is variably displayed in a form in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are aligned (corresponding to the reach effect described above), and the player is given three He enjoys the expectation that decorative symbols may be arranged in a predetermined manner and shift to an advantageous gaming state (see the first reference). In such a general gaming machine, it is desired to execute a reach effect on a specific start memory information only at a desired timing due to the effect, and to give a strong psychological impact to a player who is in contact with the reach effect. In some cases, if a reach effect is executed for other start-up memory information before that, the psychological impact may be weakened.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control program controls the reach effect using one of the following two methods (or a combination thereof) under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  First, as one method, the production control program corresponds to the start memory information that the start condition is satisfied, and the reach condition described above is satisfied, that is, the result of the special lottery may be won. (Reach effect control means). The effect control program having such a function is based on each reach lottery result command and winning information command received as described above, and wins the last starting storage information stored in the starting storage information storage area described above. The condition is satisfied (that is, the result of the special lottery is winning), and the reach determination random number value for the remaining start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area is within the non-reach range. Triggered by the fact that the winning condition is not satisfied (and the special lottery has not been won) for the remaining start memory information, the reach effect is executed on the last start memory information. (Execution control means). After that, in the reach effect corresponding to the last start memory information, the effect control program fluctuates the central decorative symbol over the variable time in a state where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. After the display, the central decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the player recognizes that it is a big hit as a mode in which these three decorative symbols are arranged.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the thundercloud mode is exemplified as the special game state transferred by the effect control program. In this thundercloud mode, the effect control program displays the telop indicating that it is in thundercloud mode from the left to the right on the upper part of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and displays the left and right variably displayed. At the stage where the reach effect is executed using the three central decorative symbols, there is a case where the effect control suggesting that there is a high possibility that the start memory information corresponding to the variation display will reach a big hit. Therefore, when the reach effect is executed in this thundercloud mode, the player can be very strongly aware that it may be a big hit with a high probability, and the interest can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, in the thundercloud mode, in the situation where the result of the special lottery is won for the last start memory information as described above, the reach effect cannot be executed for the remaining stored start memory information. It will be. If it does in this way, the psychological impact given to a player by the reach production performed in the last starting storage information can be made relatively hard to be weakened before that. Thus, the player is psychologically uplifted by the strength of the impact in contact with the suddenly executed reach production, and until the result of the special lottery regarding the last start memory information is disclosed. The game can be continued while enjoying the expectation for the big hit.

  By the way, the effect control program is able to determine whether the start condition is satisfied for the stored start memory information even when the reach condition is satisfied for the remaining start memory information stored within the preceding determination suppression range. You may make it not perform reach production. In this way, for example, when the presentation state is controlled as if it is in the probability variation state as the thundercloud mode, for example, even though the gaming state has shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, the preceding determination suppression is performed. As described above, it is avoided that the reach effect is executed in spite of the suppression of the preceding determination effect for the remaining start-up memory information that has been stored within the range, so that the player may feel uncomfortable. It will be further suppressed.

  By the way, even if the reach condition is satisfied for the specific start memory information among the remaining start memory information stored within the preceding determination suppression range, the effect control program starts the start condition for the specific start memory information. As described above, the reach effect may not be executed in response to the establishment of. In this way, for example, when the presentation state is controlled as if it is in the probability variation state as the thundercloud mode, for example, even though the gaming state has shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, the preceding determination suppression is performed. Since it is avoided that the normal reach is executed in spite of the fact that the preceding determination effect is suppressed as described above for the specific start-up memory information within the range, it is more effective to give the player a sense of discomfort. Will be suppressed.

  In addition, the effect control program wins the special lottery for the last start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area and the specific reach condition is satisfied, and the start memory information memory is stored before that. When the special lottery is won for the specific start memory information among the remaining start memory information stored in the area and the reach condition is satisfied, the normal reach for the specific start memory information is set as described above. Instead of restricting the execution of, it may be executed as it is. As described above, among the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area, a plurality of start memory information including the last start memory information and the remaining start memory information is won a plurality of times in a special lottery. However, it is possible to entertain the player with the normal reach that is executed first, and then enter the super reach that is executed later. As a result, even in the lucky situation where the jackpots are almost continuous, as described above, the super reach corresponding to the last start memory information has a psychological impact on the player, and the specific It is possible to maintain the psychological impact that the normal reach executed before that corresponds to the start-up memory information has on the player.

  By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when a winning winning of a game ball is triggered, a special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner and a big hit lottery is executed. When the condition is satisfied, there is something that shifts to the probability variation state (see the first reference described above). As described above, the pachinko gaming machine that shifts to such a probability fluctuation state, for a predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as “special time”) until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the jackpot game ends. There are those that continue the probability variation state (hereinafter referred to as “ST (special time) machine”). In such a special time, until the effect control board (corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140) shifts from the probability variation state to another game state according to the effect command received from the game control board (corresponding to the main control board 4100). A specific effect (hereinafter referred to as a special time effect) is executed. Here, in general game halls (halls), many pachinko machines are arranged facing each other on each island, so the power supplied to each pachinko machine depends on the power supply facilities and power usage conditions. Falls temporarily, resulting in an instantaneous power outage (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”). If such a momentary power failure occurs unfortunately at a certain timing, at first glance, some of the special time effects as described above are not executed, and some of the special time effects that the player should have been able to enjoy at all times. There is also a possibility that it cannot be enjoyed.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the effect control program has shifted to the probability variation gaming state as the specific gaming state, the special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is an example of the specific gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. A special time effect (specific effect) with a predetermined number of variable display times is started. That is, the effect control program controls a special time effect (specific effect) in which the number of times of display change of the special symbol until the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability change game state (specific effect control means). . On the other hand, even if the effect control program temporarily falls into a situation where the special time effect cannot be controlled, the remaining time of this special time effect is based on the new game state information received next, as will be described in detail later. Production is executed.

  Specifically, even if the effect control program temporarily falls into a state where the special time effect cannot be controlled (specific effect control means), the game state is determined based on the remaining number of times information included in the next received command. Remaining number of times that the special symbol is variably displayed by the time the game state other than the probability variation state is changed, and the remaining number is suggested as a part of the special time performance over the grasped remaining number of times. The number of times effect is executed (remaining number of times effect complementing means).

  In this way, even if the production control program temporarily becomes unable to control the special time production on the peripheral control board 4140 due to, for example, the influence of an instantaneous power failure, the next special symbol variation display is started. As a trigger, it is possible to restart the remaining number of times of the aspect suggesting the remaining number of times as the remaining effects of the special time effect. Players who have been in contact with such a remaining number of times will have a reminder that if the remaining number of times is revived after the remaining number of times is temporarily stopped, such interruption is also part of the direction. Thus, the influence of the momentary power failure described above can be made difficult to play.

[16. Delay control]
By the way, in a conventional pachinko gaming machine, as a game progresses, a predetermined control body outputs production control data and causes a predetermined production device that receives the production control data to perform production operations, thereby making the player bored. Although it is difficult to feel (see the first reference above), in conventional pachinko gaming machines, it may be necessary to adjust the display timing of images depending on various circumstances. Since it is necessary to synchronize with the operation timing of the production device, the control tends to be complicated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the purpose is to facilitate synchronization with the effect device without requiring complicated control, and the details will be described later, but the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control means) is an information storage means. A ring buffer is provided as an example, and a delay control unit as an example of information output control means is provided. This ring buffer includes a plurality of buffers as an example of a plurality of unit storage areas in which effect control data for controlling the effect operation by the effect device described later can be temporarily stored. On the other hand, the delay control unit delays the timing at which the stored presentation control data from any one of the plurality of buffers (predetermined unit storage area) should be extracted by a predetermined delay amount from the original timing. The stored production control data is extracted and output. Hereinafter, it demonstrates concretely, referring drawings.

[16-1. Configuration example related to delay control]
FIG. 106 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example regarding delay control. FIG. 106 mainly shows a functional configuration example for realizing delay control, but here, for convenience of explanation, a configuration example related to hardware related to delay control is also shown. Show.

[16-2. Control on main control board side]
As already described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105, in the main control board 4100, the winning determination unit 4100 z receives a game ball in one of the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2102 and starts. While the above-mentioned start condition is satisfied when a detection signal is output from the switch (corresponding to the start SW shown in the figure), whether or not the above-described winning condition is satisfied by executing a winning lottery And the determination result is output to the transmission unit 4100w as winning information. The transmission unit 4100w includes a transmission buffer 4100ws. The transmission unit 4100w stores the winning information output by the winning determination unit 4100z in the transmission buffer 4100ws and performs serial (or parallel) communication with the peripheral control board 4140 when the above-described start condition is satisfied. To output.

  On the other hand, the variation lottery unit 4100y selects a variation pattern according to the established winning condition from a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance when the above-described start condition is established, and the variation result is changed to the variation pattern. The corresponding variation pattern command is output to the transmission unit 4100w. The transmission unit 4100w stores the variation pattern command output by the variation lottery unit 4100y in the transmission buffer, and, for example, the peripheral control board 4140 together with the winning information when the start condition described above is satisfied. Output according to serial or parallel communication system.

[16-3. Peripheral control board side]
The peripheral control unit 4150 mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 has a reception buffer 4150pj for temporarily storing commands output from the main control board 4100 as a function of the peripheral control MPU 4150a as shown in FIG. Besides the image system (for example, at least one system of light output, sound output, and motor drive) other than the image system (for example, light output, sound output, and motor drive) in addition to the interpreter 4150q and the driver that determines the consistency of the command in the unit 4150p and the reception buffer 4150pj Are provided with a selection & output unit 4150r for reading data 4150t, a delay control unit 4150s, and a response control unit 4150u.

  As for the driver here, regarding the sound output on the frame side, audio data such as music and sound effects is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Audio data transmission IC 4160c that outputs to the frame side, while regarding the light output on the frame side, the driver IC (not shown) that outputs the production control data to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 described above Can be mentioned.

  On the other hand, as the driver as described above, regarding the light output on the game board side, a driver IC (not shown) that outputs effect control data to the lamp drive board 4170 described above can be cited. As for the motor drive on the side, a driver IC (not shown) that outputs effect control data to the motor drive board 4180 described above can be cited.

  Further, the peripheral control unit 4150 reads image control data 4150w (hereinafter referred to as “drawing list”) as an example of effect control data as an image system, generates a display command, and outputs it to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a 4150v. And a VDP 4160 for reading image data used to display an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the image data storage unit 4160z based on the generated display command. Here, in the present embodiment, “image control data” indicates data (so-called “scenario data”) that defines what image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (so-called “scenario data”). Data), which is different from the data of the image itself to be displayed. On the other hand, “image data” indicates sprite data used for displaying an image (so-called “sprite” or the like) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is data read out from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b as a so-called character ROM. .

[16-4. Specific Method in Delay Control Unit]
[16-4-1. Delay control using pointer (pointer switching)]
FIG. 107 shows an example of a ring buffer more specifically, and is an example of a state in which delay control using a pointer is performed. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a specific method related to delay control unit 4150s and delay control in FIG. In the present embodiment, a ring buffer is used as an example of the delay control unit 4150s. However, the present invention is not limited to such a ring buffer, and may be a serial buffer such as a so-called FIFO. It may be a buffer in which data is stored in a sequential manner.

  First, the ring buffer 4150sa includes a 0th buffer 4150sa0 to a seventh buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas), and each buffer 4150sa0 and the like is given a start address as a head address of each storage area. The 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) can be specified as long as the start addresses of the respective buffers are defined, and therefore the same storage capacity is not necessarily used. In the embodiment, it is preferable that the storage areas have the same storage capacity, for example. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, each buffer (each unit storage area) will be described as an example of a storage area for the same storage capacity starting from the start address. In order to distinguish each buffer (each predetermined unit storage area), these 0th buffer 4150sa0 to 7th buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) are, for example, buffers as identification information from No. 0 to No. 7, respectively. A number is assigned. In the present embodiment, the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 can be identified and identified by pointers (identifiers) corresponding to the respective start addresses.

  By the way, in this embodiment, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a is synchronized with the progress of each frame display by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, that is, for example, a frame interrupt is applied, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is shown in FIG. In the pointer update process, it is first determined whether or not the pointer needs to be updated (step S1401). The pointer here includes a write pointer that points to the start address of the buffer to which the effect control data is to be written, and a capture pointer that points to the start address of the stored buffer.

  As one of the conditions for updating the pointer in this way, it can be mentioned that the frame has progressed, that is, that the next frame has been displayed after the frame has been displayed. In addition to the progress of the frame, the fact that a specific condition is satisfied may also be included. As such a specific condition, for example, including that the effect control data is set (stored) in any of the buffers, the pointer points to even though the effect control data is not stored in any of the buffers. It is possible to suppress the buffer from moving one after another.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the write pointer and the capture pointer need to be updated, the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the write pointer to +1 (step S1402), and updates the capture pointer to +1 (step S1402). S1403). On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the write pointer and the capture pointer do not need to be updated, the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends the pointer update process and repeatedly executes the above-described steady process.

  In the present embodiment, as a condition for updating the pointer in this way, it can be mentioned that the frame display is progressing. Note that the updating of the pointer may be performed in accordance with another specific cycle instead of being performed in accordance with the progress of the frame display.

  The outline of the delay control using the pointer is as follows. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a tries to store certain performance control data in the ring buffer 4150sa, the peripheral buffer MPU 4150a uses the write pointer to set the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas in the ring buffer 4150sa). ) In the designated buffer (predetermined unit storage area), the production control data is stored in the designated predetermined buffer, and the write pointer corresponding to the stored start address of the predetermined buffer (hereinafter referred to as the designated buffer) Are also managed in association with the stored presentation control data. Thereafter, similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a repeatedly stores each subsequent production control data group in the ring buffer 4150sa. At this time, with respect to each stored production control data, a pointer (identifier) that can be specified by distinguishing each buffer. ) Is used to manage the storage order of any of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to 7th buffer 4150sa7.

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds a pointer corresponding to the start address of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 by +1 for each frame progress to update the start address every predetermined period, and this updated start A state in which each of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 can be designated once using the address is repeated.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the stored effect control based on the pointer at the timing when the stored effect control data is to be taken out from the predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) as the writing position. The data is specified, extracted from the predetermined buffer (hereinafter also referred to as “capture position”), and output to the driver.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the timing at which the effect control data stored in any one of the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7 is to be taken out from the original timing. The stored presentation control data is delayed for a predetermined delay amount due to the time difference until the stored presentation control data is extracted, and the stored presentation control data is extracted and output to the driver.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a shifts the position designation of the pointer for controlling the designation of the start address of each buffer among the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 7th buffer 4150sa7, so that the predetermined control described above is performed. A delay amount of delay is generated. As for the updating method and update timing of the pointer, a pointer indicating a buffer for writing the effect control data (hereinafter also simply referred to as “writing position”) and a buffer for the fetching position of the stored effect control data (hereinafter, referred to as “write position”). For example, the same condition may be applied to a pointer indicating a “capture position”.

[16-4-1-1. Delay control by changing the capture position]
As a method for setting such a predetermined delay amount, for example, a method of obtaining and setting the capture position by back-calculating a predetermined delay amount from the initial write position by changing the capture position can be employed. This will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart illustrating an example of effect control data write-in control processing. This write-in control process is executed, for example, triggered by a frame interrupt. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets predetermined presentation control data in, for example, a buffer at a position indicated by a writing pointer updated as described above (hereinafter also referred to as “writing initial position”) (step S1501).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines a predetermined delay amount (for example, +2 frames) as a delay amount (step S1502), subtracts the delay amount from the write initial position, takes in the calculation result, and acquires the initial position. Is set (step S1503).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the capture prohibition period as follows as an example of a method of delaying the extraction timing of the stored effect control data over a time corresponding to the predetermined delay amount. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a predetermined time as the capture prohibition period (step S1504), and then checks whether the capture prohibition period has elapsed (step S1505). The peripheral control MPU 4150a counts down by −1 every time a frame progresses when the capture prohibition period starts and reaches 0 when the capture prohibition period ends. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 takes out the stored presentation control data from the buffer corresponding to the initial capture position and outputs it to the driver (production operation executing means).

  Here, as an example, when the requested position (write initial position) is the fifth buffer 4150sa5 and the delay is set to three buffers, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the 5-3 = 2nd as the initial capture position. Set as a buffer (that is, the second buffer 4150sa2). That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets 3 frames as the capture prohibition period.

  The method for delaying the extraction timing of the stored presentation control data over the time corresponding to the predetermined delay amount is not limited to setting the capture prohibition period as described above, but other methods. May be adopted. Specifically, as such a method, for example, a method of comparing whether or not the capturing position is the same as the writing position where the effect control data is set may be employed.

[16-4-1-2. Delay control by changing the writing position]
On the other hand, as a method for setting the predetermined delay amount as described above, instead of the delay control by changing the capture position described above, for example, a method for obtaining and setting the write position by calculating back the predetermined delay amount from the capture position. Can also be adopted.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes, for example, a production control data write-in control process triggered by a frame interrupt. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds a delay amount to the fetch position buffer for the new effect control data, and sets the writing position from the calculation result.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a predetermined time as the capture prohibition period, and then checks whether or not the capture prohibition period has elapsed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a counts down by −1 every time a frame progresses when the capture prohibition period starts and reaches 0 when the capture prohibition period ends. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 extracts the stored presentation control data from the buffer corresponding to the capture position and outputs it to the driver (production operation executing means).

  Here, as an example, when the capture position is set to the third buffer (that is, the third buffer 4150sa3) and the delay is set to three buffers, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the 3 + 3 = 6th as the write position. The buffer is set (that is, the sixth buffer 4150sa6).

  Note that, as described above, in the capture prohibition period, regarding the buffer corresponding to the position specified by the difference between the capture position and the write position, the buffer contents are invalidated (capture prohibition) over the frame display period corresponding to the difference. Is to do.

  As described above, according to the delay control by changing either the capture position or the write position, the effect control data output as described above is the 0th in a manner in which the storage order can be specified in the ring buffer 4150sa. Since the data is stored in a predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) out of the buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas), it is held for a predetermined period, which corresponds to the above-described import prohibition period. The output waiting time is constantly generated.

[16-4-2. Delay control by data movement]
110 to 112 each specifically show still another form of the ring buffer as an example, and is an example of a state in which delay control by data movement is performed, for example. 110 to 112 are diagrams showing an example of a specific method related to the delay control unit 4150s and the delay control in FIG. In this embodiment, a ring buffer is used as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to such a ring buffer, and may be a serial buffer such as a so-called FIFO. It may be a buffer in which data is stored.

  As described above, the ring buffer 4150sa includes the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas). These 0th buffer 4150sa0 to 7th buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) do not necessarily have the same storage capacity, but in this embodiment, for example, the storage areas of the same storage capacity are used. It is supposed to be. In order to distinguish each buffer (each predetermined unit storage area), these 0th buffer 4150sa0 to 7th buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) are, for example, buffers as identification information from No. 0 to No. 7, respectively. A number is assigned.

  The outline of delay control by data movement is as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 110, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores certain performance control data in a predetermined buffer (for example, the 0th buffer 4150sa0) as a predetermined unit storage area among these 0th buffer 4150sa0 to 7th buffer 4150sa7. After the storage, the effect control data stored in the 0th buffer 4150sa0 is stored as shown in FIG. 111 in accordance with the progress of each frame display by the liquid crystal display device 1900. Move to the first buffer 4150sa1. Further, when the next frame interrupt occurs, the peripheral control MPU 4150a moves the effect control data stored in the first buffer 4150sa1 to the next second buffer 4150sa2. Similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a repeats as shown in FIG. 112 every time a next frame interrupt occurs, and moves the effect control data from the buffer in which the effect control data has been stored to the next buffer. Finally, the effect control data is read from the seventh buffer 4150sa7.

  As described above, when a certain effect control data is to be stored in the ring buffer 4150sa, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a predetermined one of the zeroth buffer 4150sa0 to the seventh buffer 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas) in the ring buffer 4150sa. A buffer (predetermined unit storage area) is designated, the production control data is stored in the designated predetermined buffer, and the stored write position is managed in association with the stored production control data. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the stored effect control data at the timing at which the stored effect control data should be taken out from the predetermined buffer (predetermined unit storage area) as the writing position. The data is taken out from the predetermined buffer (hereinafter also referred to as “capture position”) and output to the driver.

  The ring buffer 4150sa described above may be configured such that the number of buffers is changed according to the delay amount. In the above-described embodiment, the ring buffer 4150sa employs a method of designating the write position and the capture position in the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The writing position and the capturing position may always be the same. In this way, it is not necessary to manage the capture position and the write position. As a specific example, for example, if the delay amount is always 4 frames, the 0th buffer 4150sa0 to the 4th buffer 4150sa4 are secured as buffers, while the 0th buffer 4150sa0 is fixed to the write position. In addition, the fourth buffer sa4 can be fixed at the take-in position.

  Further, the buffer size is secured for the maximum delay, but one of the write position and the capture position in the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7 may be fixed in order to adjust the delay amount. For example, when the delay amount is 4 frames, the write position is the 0th buffer sa0 and the capture position is the 5th buffer sa5. In this case, the sixth buffer sa6 and the seventh buffer sa7 are unused areas. On the other hand, when the capture position is fixed to the seventh buffer sa7, the write position may be changed according to the delay amount. For example, when the delay amount is 5 frames, the write position is written from the second buffer sa2, not the zeroth buffer sa0. Therefore, the zeroth buffer sa0 and the first buffer sa1 are unused areas. Note that the adjustment of the delay amount may be switched when a condition such as a game state or a variation mode is satisfied.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the stored effect control data at a timing at which the effect control data stored in any one of the plurality of buffers (corresponding to the writing position) should be taken out from the original timing. The stored presentation control data is taken out and output to the driver with a delay of a predetermined delay amount due to the time difference until it is taken out. In other words, in this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a certain amount of delay from the output of the effect control data corresponding to the effect device to the operation of the effect device until the effect control data is actually input to the effect device. It is assumed that has occurred.

[16-5. Configuration example mainly related to response control]
Next, a configuration example relating to response control will be described with reference to FIG. The above-described response control unit 4150u (response control means) satisfies the predetermined condition even before the above-described original timing is delayed by a predetermined delay amount (corresponding to the above-described “capture prohibition period”). As a result, the delay control unit 4150s (information output control means) stores the above information from any one of the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas). The production control data is taken out and output to the driver 4150v (production operation executing means). Then, the effect device 4190 (effect means) immediately starts executing the effect operation based on the effect control data output to the driver 4150v. As an example of this effect device 4190, details will be described later. For example, any one of a speaker (sound output means), a lamp (light output means), an accessory motor (an accessory drive means), or a combination of these is given. be able to. In the present embodiment, as an example, the rendering device 4190 (rendering means) includes a driving unit (a combination motor) that is driven based on the rendering control data and a movable accessory that operates in a predetermined manner by the driving unit. To do.

  By the way, in this embodiment, a response-dedicated buffer may be provided separately from the delay control unit 4150s (hereinafter also referred to as “delay buffer”) including a plurality of buffers 4150sa1 to 4150sa7. As a situation in which such a response-dedicated buffer is used, for example, a case is assumed where responsiveness is required for production. As the response buffer, instead of preparing a plurality of buffers 4150sa1 to 4150sa7 as in the delay buffer described above, for example, a single buffer configuration (not shown) is used. This response buffer waits for the completion of the writing of the effect control data to the single buffer, and the effect control data as the contents stored in the buffer is taken out by the driver 4150v.

  Further, such a response-dedicated buffer may be composed of, for example, a plurality of buffers instead of a single buffer as described above. By using a plurality of buffers in this way, it is possible to write other effect control data to the next buffer even during the capture of the effect control data from one buffer. Processing and capture processing can be performed simultaneously. However, in the case of a plurality of buffer configurations, since the time from writing to fetching is delayed, it is necessary to set the number of buffers so as not to impair the responsiveness. For example, with a double buffer configuration, if writing and capturing can be performed simultaneously, a delay of one buffer will occur at the first writing, but a delay will not occur from the next capturing. It is possible to suppress (or avoid) response as much as possible. As the buffer, as shown in FIG. 114B, a dedicated buffer may be provided for each effect device.

  The effect control data set in the response dedicated buffer may be switched according to the state of the game, for example, or may be fixed for each effect device. For example, when the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 is operated as an effect button, when it is desired to output a sound effect at the same time as the operation, only the effect control data of the sound effect device (for example, a speaker) associated with the operation of the button unit 220C. May be fixed to the response-dedicated buffer. In this case, whether to use the delay buffer or the response dedicated buffer is managed according to the type of sound.

  In the present embodiment, as an example of the “predetermined condition” described above, for example, an operation signal is output according to the operation mode of the button unit 220C (operation means) that can be operated from the outside. The predetermined condition is not limited to the operation of the button unit 220C, and may be triggered by the occurrence of another predetermined event. For example, when a player develops a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than a normal reach (equivalent to the so-called “special reach”), or when a special performance starts, such as when a big hit is performed It may be triggered by the case.

[16-6. Specific example of response control]
FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating a first example of a response to the player's operation under the assumption that the delay control is performed. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating a response to the player's operation under the assumption of performing the delay control. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example. 113 (A) and 114 (A) each show an example of an internal production sequence, and FIGS. 113 (B) and 114 (B) show production sequences for operation triggers, respectively. An example is shown.

[16-6-1. First example regarding response]
In the first example relating to the response, for example, an effect sequence serving as the main axis and an effect sequence of the operation trigger are provided in a double manner, and the effect sequence of the operation trigger responds immediately with a delay amount of zero. In the first example related to this response, a set of production control data necessary for production is prepared in advance, and the design burden such as capacity limitation and production control data in advance is slightly increased. It becomes possible to obtain a feeling of operation.

[16-6-1-1. Internal production sequence management]
In the first example shown in FIG. 113A, delay control is performed on the effect reproduction mechanism side (corresponding to the delay control unit 4150s described above). Employing such a method can reduce the burden of production work of production control data, although the production reproduction mechanism itself is somewhat complicated by performing the delay control on the production reproduction mechanism side.

  First, as is common in the following description, the peripheral request ROM 4160b or the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab stores a drawing request list having the following configuration. That is, in such a drawing request list, for example, the drawing list 1 corresponds to the first frame, the drawing list 2 corresponds to the second frame, and the drawing list 3 corresponds to the third frame. The drawing list 4 corresponds to the fourth frame, the drawing list 5 corresponds to the fifth frame, and the drawing list 6 corresponds to the sixth frame.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a generates the following display list. That is, in the display list, for example, the drawing list 1 corresponds to the first frame, the drawing list 2 corresponds to the second frame, the drawing list 3 corresponds to the third frame, and the fourth The drawing list 4 corresponds to the frame, the drawing list 5 corresponds to the fifth frame, and the drawing list 6 corresponds to the sixth frame.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a interprets the display list, performs cache management, and reconstructs the display list, while performing delay control using the delay control unit 4150s. For example, as shown in FIG. A delay amount for the frame is generated. In this example, instead of the peripheral control MPU 4150a executing such processing, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a may execute such processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a operates under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and is delayed by 4 frames by the delay control unit 4150s, that is, shifted backward in time by 4 frame interrupts, and draws data to a frame buffer (not shown). The drawing process is executed by writing.

  On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, in the next frame interrupt delayed by the four frames (that is, delayed by five frames), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stored in the frame buffer and is based on the drawing data corresponding to the drawing list 1. An image is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays an image with a delay amount of 5 frames from the original timing. When the next frame interruption occurs, an image based on the drawing data corresponding to the drawing list 2 delayed by 6 frames is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, each time a frame interrupt is made thereafter, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is also stored in the frame buffer after being delayed by 5 frames as a predetermined delay amount, and stored in each drawing list. Video groups based on corresponding drawing data are displayed one after another.

  By the way, the selection & output unit 4150r switches between the response side (response control unit 4150s) and the delay side (delay control unit 4150s) as the output destination of the extracted data 4150t. In this case, the selection & output unit 4150r needs to perform management for switching whether the captured data 4150t is output to the response side or to the delay side. As an example of the management method, for example, it is determined that the status of the production is switched, or information indicating in which data is output is set in advance in the captured data itself. Switching may be performed on the delay side.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the configuration of the peripheral control board 4140 is divided into an image system and a non-image system, and the response side (response control unit 4150s) and the delay side (delay control unit 4150s) for the image system. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image system may be similarly divided into a response side and a delay side.

[16-6-1-2. Production sequence for operation opportunity]
As shown in FIG. 113 (B), the operation trigger production sequence is configured to read all the production control data necessary for the operation trigger sequence in advance and respond immediately. According to the effect sequence for the operation trigger, the burden when executing the effect control is increased, but since the delay amount is 0, the response can be improved.

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a handles a set of effect control data for an effect device that should be handled in response to the player's operation as the effect control data. For example, the screen (liquid crystal display device 1900, etc.), lamp, sound output Production control data for driving the motor of the part (speaker) and the accessory is used.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a presupposes that a predetermined amount of delay has occurred with respect to the screen display related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 in this way, but that the predetermined condition has been established, for example, the player presses the button When the unit 220C is operated, the delay control amount is set to 0 as shown in FIG. 113 (B), and the effect control data stored in the response dedicated buffer (not shown) described later is immediately received from the response control unit 4150u. Alternatively, the response control unit 4150u causes the stored effect control data to be extracted from any one of the plurality of buffers 4150sa0 to 4150sa7 (a plurality of unit storage areas). The driver 4150v (production operation executing means) outputs the result. Then, the effect device 4190 (effect means) related to the screen, lamp, sound, and accessory performs the effect operation immediately without waiting for the delay amount based on the effect control data output to the driver 4150v.

[16-6-2. Second example of response]
In the second example regarding the response, instead of immediately responding in synchronization with all the production devices such as speakers, lamps, and accessory motors, triggered by the operation of the button unit 220C (operation means) by the player, By causing only some of the production devices to respond immediately according to the operation, the player can feel the good response as an illusion.

  That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the rendering operation of a plurality of rendering devices such as the above-described speakers, the rendering control is performed at the same time so that the rendering devices are controlled in synchronization with the multiple rendering devices in the normal time. Although the data is taken out, the effect control data at a timing different from other effect devices for some effect devices among these effect devices when a predetermined condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied By taking out the effect control for the part of the effect devices at a timing different from that of the other effect devices (response control means).

  First, when comparing the first example and the second example described above, the first example shown in FIG. 113 described above is limited to an image (corresponding to the screen shown in the figure) and pre-reads. Can be taken as a thing. In the case of the first example, it is necessary to prepare a drawing list or the like in advance when operating and when not operating. In FIG. 113, the image is specialized only for an image (corresponding to the screen shown in the figure), but there is no need to specialize for the image in this way. On the other hand, it can be said that the second example shown in FIG. 114 includes other than such images (sound, lamp, accessory).

  In this embodiment, as described above, the response control unit 4150u (the response dedicated buffer) does not necessarily include a plurality of buffers (a plurality of unit storage areas), and is configured by a single buffer. Also good.

  In the second example, it can be said that the work load can be reduced in the points described later when compared with an example where the work load when producing the production control data is large (the first example). First, in the second example, as in the first example, it is somewhat difficult to control the video without any delay, and therefore it is possible to include a part of the video in order to make it easier. However, some or all of the production devices other than the video of the player are made to respond immediately according to the player's operation. For example, the image can be delayed from the moment when the button unit 220C (operation means) is operated, but the sound is output immediately and the lamp outputs light immediately. Thereby, the effect that the response as the whole production went up as an illusion can be exhibited. On the other hand, the screen (video) can be expressed as a whole flash or a momentary expansion, so that the effect can be exhibited as if the response is improved without increasing the difficulty of mounting.

(1) Internal production sequence management The internal production sequence in the second example shown in FIG. 114 (A) is the same as the internal production sequence (see FIG. 113 (A)) in the first example. Similarly, although the delay amount of the video is 5 frames and the effect reproduction mechanism is slightly complicated, the work load when producing the effect control data is small. In other words, since the delay can be freely performed only by the driver (buffer) management shown in FIG. 114A, it is not necessary to consider the delay amount for each effect. For this reason, according to the 2nd example shown in Drawing 114 (A), work burden at the time of creating production control data can be made small.

(2) Production Sequence for Operation Trigger In the case of the second example shown in FIG. 114 (B), for example, only a production device that does not require advance preparation is immediately responded to an operation. In the case of this second example, the delay amount is 0 frame, the response is good, and the work burden when producing the production control data is reduced.

  According to the embodiments as described above, when controlling the rendering operations of the plurality of rendering devices, the rendering control is performed at the same time so that the rendering devices 4190 are synchronized with each other during the normal time. It is assumed that data is extracted. Under such a premise, in the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a timing different from other effect devices for some of the effect devices 4190 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, the production control data is extracted, and the production control is started at a timing different from that of the other production devices for the part of the production devices. In this way, the player who was originally used to the presentation that was executed with a delay of the predetermined delay amount suddenly triggered the establishment of the predetermined condition (predetermined condition). Experience the improved response, feel surprised by the steep operation of the production device, improve the fun of the game.

[17. How to eliminate touch LCD abnormalities]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, there are those equipped with various devices in order to make the player's interest difficult to exhaust (see the first reference). Such a device is generally subjected to an initial process when the power is turned on, and then continuously drives in a specified operation mode. On the other hand, in a game hall (hall), not only is it constantly prone to noise because a large number of game balls are transported, but also in the game machine, not only the flow of game balls but also the circuit and power supply generate noise. It may occur. Depending on the type of device described above, at first glance, it may be considered that the device does not operate in the above-mentioned prescribed operation mode due to the influence of such noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the presentation operation program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation means) is pressed in a prescribed operation mode (for example, five times) based on an operation signal from a switch (not shown). ) (Hereinafter referred to as “the reset condition is satisfied”), the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (one device) is partially reset without being reset. The side liquid crystal display device 246 (the other device) is reset. In addition, the effect control program may reset the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 246 when a predetermined condition described later is satisfied and the reset condition described above is satisfied. .

  As such a predetermined condition, as a first example, for example, the main body frame 4 or the door frame 5 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2. First, as described above, the main control program (game control means) is a door frame opening command (specific frame opening) triggered by the door frame 5 being opened under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. On the other hand, a body frame opening command (specific frame opening state command) is output when the body frame 4 is opened.

  When the effect control program receives a command (command) output by the main control program under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 (command receiving means), the command is a door frame open command or a body frame open command. It is determined whether or not there is. When the command is a door opening command or a body frame opening command, the effect control program assumes that the predetermined condition described above is satisfied.

  For example, it is desirable that such a predetermined condition is basically a condition that can be satisfied when a special operation permitted as a privilege is performed by a store clerk in a game hall (hall). Such a predetermined condition is not limited to the door frame 5 or the main body frame 4 being opened as described above, but may be other situations.

  In the present embodiment, as such a predetermined condition, it is more preferable that the door frame 5 is opened than the body frame 4 is opened. This is because, in the event of any trouble, the game store clerk generally accepts the game ball to the general prize opening 2104 or the like as an apology for suspending the game after the handling of the trouble is completed. Since a number of prize ball services are often provided to players, a single operation of opening the door frame 5 can serve as the establishment of the predetermined condition and preparation for the prize ball service. is there.

  More specifically, in the production control program as described above, such a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation means) performs a predetermined operation based on the above-described operation signal. It is determined whether or not the manual reset condition is satisfied by operating in the mode (pressed five times) (manual reset condition determining means). It should be noted that the manual reset condition is not only that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the prescribed operation mode as described above, but also that, for example, other operations that can be mainly known only by a game shop clerk are performed. good. The above-described effect control program is triggered by the establishment of such a manual reset condition, while maintaining the control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means) and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 ( (Second display means) is reset (display initialization means). That is, the effect control program controls the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and controls the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as usual using the channel CH1, while at the same time, the channel CH2 (see FIG. 21). ) To the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246.

  If it does in this way, the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device 246 which received this reset signal will perform a regular reset process, will restart, and will operate | move by the said regular operation | movement aspect after that. Thus, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 that has become inoperable in the prescribed operation mode as it should be can be easily operated by a simple operation, especially when the probability changing function is in operation. In an aspect, it can be restored to operate in the prescribed operating mode.

  By the way, the effect control program sets a permissible reset period as a period during which a reset signal is allowed to be output from the channel CH2 (see FIG. 21) of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. You may make it set. As such a reset allowable period, a period in which the start information storage information is not stored in the start storage information storage area with respect to either the first special symbol or the second special symbol (a period in which the so-called hold number is 0) is included. Can be mentioned. Specifically, the start storage information storage corresponding to the special symbol change display waiting is generated based on at least one of the special symbol 1 storage command and the special symbol 2 storage command received from the main control board 4100 by the effect control program. If there is no start memory information storage waiting for variable display, the reset allowable period is set, while if there is a start memory information memory waiting for variable display, The reset allowable period is not set, and the above-described reset signal output is restricted. In this way, when the so-called holding number is not 0, the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 246 does not receive the reset signal and perform the specified reset process. Do not give the player watching the dish-side liquid crystal display device 246 anxiety that the number of on-holds has become ambiguous or that the start-up memory information (start-up hold) itself has disappeared. Can be.

  By the way, the production control program performs the reset process of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246, for example, after the automatic reset condition is satisfied, instead of when the automatic reset condition is satisfied. It may be executed at the timing when the decorative symbol is variably displayed when the start condition is satisfied after it is satisfied (the change display of the special symbol is started). In this way, even when the reset process is executed, the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 246 that starts displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner displays nothing for a moment, so that the expectation for the big hit is given (hereinafter, Recognizing that the “blackout production” was executed, and making it feel as if it was part of the production, the player ’s interest decreased when the reset process was executed. Can be difficult.

  In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are those equipped with various detection devices such as sensors in order to make the player's interest less exhausted (see the above-mentioned first reference). . Such a detection device is generally adjusted for sensitivity as an initial process when the power is turned on, and then operates at the sensitivity. However, a large number of game balls are transported not only in the game machine but also in the game hall, and the player himself also generates static electricity, so that noise is always easily generated. Depending on the type of the detection device described above, it may seem that the detection sensitivity may not be appropriate due to the influence of such noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control program executes an elapsed time in which the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a specified contact state to be described later under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. When the time is exceeded, the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is automatically reset partially without resetting the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means).

  Specifically, the effect control program detects the contact of the contact surface detected by the touch panel 246 (contact type input unit) on a counter (contact duration measuring unit) (not shown) or the RTC control unit 4160 (contact duration measuring unit). The elapsed time in which the state is a prescribed contact state (eg, “continuous contact state of 1 second or longer”) is measured. The effect control program determines whether or not the elapsed time measured as such a continuous contact state has exceeded, for example, 1 second (the specified elapsed time) (hereinafter, whether or not the “automatic reset condition” is satisfied). ) (Automatic reset condition determination means). Note that this automatic reset condition is not only that the contact state of the contact surface remains in the prescribed contact state over a predetermined elapsed time, but other events continue over the predetermined elapsed time. It may be that. Furthermore, the presentation control program is triggered by the establishment of the automatic reset condition, while maintaining the control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means) and the touch panel module 246a (contact type input) as a touch panel controller. By resetting the control means), the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is reset (contact initialization means).

  In this case, since the touch panel 246 is restarted, the touch panel 246 (detection device) that has temporarily stopped operating with an appropriate detection sensitivity is automatically operated again with an appropriate detection sensitivity. be able to.

  By the way, in this embodiment, a plurality of effect tables are provided, and the plurality of effect tables are first effect tables that have a relatively high probability of performing effect operations using the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 246. And the 2nd production table with a relatively low probability of performing production operation using the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 is included. The effect control program uses the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 from among the plurality of effect tables, for example, when the special reset condition is satisfied five times (a specified number of variable display times) from the time when the manual reset condition is established. The probability of selecting the first effect table with a relatively high probability of executing the effect operation is set low. If it does in this way, after the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device 246 is reset, it may become difficult to perform presentation operation | movement using the upper plate | side liquid crystal display device 246 over the said fluctuation | variation display frequency | count (5 times). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to notice the behavior of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 immediately after resetting, and even when the player is reset, the interest is not easily lowered.

[Calibration timing (power on / off)]
By the way, in a recent general pachinko gaming machine, various detection devices such as sensors are mounted in order to exhibit the gameability that the player is hardly interested in (see the first reference). As such a detection device, generally, adjustment of sensitivity is performed as an initial process at the time of power-on, and then many devices operate after that sensitivity. However, in recent general pachinko machines, even if the sensitivity is adjusted in the initial processing as described above, at first glance, depending on the gaming environment thereafter, the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate. .

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the production control program controls the power supply open / close control unit 4140c (power supply control means) at a predetermined timing by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to instantaneously stop or temporarily stop power supply. Then, by restarting the supply of electric power immediately after that, at the predetermined timing, the contact on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is performed at the predetermined timing by the above-described power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a. Sensitivity is adjusted (adjustment timing control means).

  As a specific method for adjusting the contact sensitivity, the effect control program is triggered by the start of the supply of power to the touch panel controller 481 by the power control unit under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a as described above. When the contact surface is in a non-contact state, the contact determination threshold value of the control register 481a in which the contact determination threshold value as the capacitance is stored is forcibly set, and a predetermined initial value of the contact determination threshold value ( (Hereinafter also referred to as “initial contact determination threshold”).

  In this way, for example, even if a new function is not added to adjust the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 during a game, the touch-sensitive contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a is used in advance. Then, the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 can be adjusted at a desired timing. Therefore, even when a problem occurs in the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 during the game, the chance that the player feels uncomfortable when operating the contact surface of the touch panel 246 can be reduced as much as possible. .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the production control program controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a to control the power supply open / close control unit 4140c (power supply control means) to stop the supply of power instantaneously or temporarily temporarily for a predetermined period. Over time, an output of an effect command (command) that causes the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 246 (second display means) to execute a display operation that prompts the contact type input means to contact the operation surface. Is regulated (contact reminding regulation means).

  In this way, the player can reduce the chances of touching the contact surface of the touch panel 246 over the specified period, so that the player feels uncomfortable in operation while adjusting the contact sensitivity. It can be made difficult.

[18. Game specification browsing function]
[18-1. Booklet information display]
By the way, in general, a player can read a game machine related information magazine in advance for a game machine that he / she is familiar with, but if he / she encounters a new game machine he / she is not familiar to, As an information source for grasping the specifications of the machine, it is possible to refer to a booklet that is provided by the game machine manufacturer and prepared in the game hall before the game starts. In recent years, gaming machines have a gaming characteristic characterized by each model (refer to the first reference mentioned above). By referring to such a booklet, a player can easily obtain an overview of the gaming specifications of the model. (Hereinafter, such a current situation is also referred to as “predetermined background”). The related information magazine as described above is not an information source that can be surely obtained because the player has to go to the store for purchase one by one. On the other hand, the booklet has a limited number of copies provided by a gaming machine manufacturing company, and is not necessarily available to all desired players.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the structure of the storage area of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b (production control storage means) is subjected to a model-specific production operation according to the production command as shown in FIG. Model information as a specified storage area fixedly secured in a space from a specified start address to a specified end address, independently of the effect data area 4160ba in which effect data used for control is stored in advance. A data area 4160bb is formed.

  In this model information data area 4160bb, a plurality of page unit model information data for displaying the model information of the model (hereinafter referred to as “booklet information”) as a plurality of pages as an example of information relating to game contents is specified as described above. Are stored in advance from a prescribed start address in the storage area. In the present embodiment, all the page unit model information data is collectively referred to as “model information data”. The blank area 4160bc represents the remaining space that is not filled with the data when the data is stored in the storage area of the effect data area 4160ba.

  In the present embodiment, as such model information data, for example, data for displaying booklet information including a description of at least one of a gaming method and a gaming specification regarding a specific model of a pachinko gaming machine divided into a plurality of pages. Can be mentioned. Here, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment is illustrated as the model A, while the pachinko gaming machine including another gaming board is illustrated as the model B. In any of these models, model information data unique to each model is stored in a space extending from the top address (corresponding to the “start address” described above) of the model information data area 4160ba to the specified end address.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a, for example, when the game is not continued, the production control program is triggered by the detection of the specified contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact state detection means), and the liquid crystal and sound control unit The specified start address and the specified end address of the storage area of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b are fixedly specified in the sound source VDP 4160a of 4160, and data for a specified capacity is uniformly read from the model information data area 4160bb. (Model information data control means). The read data includes model information data as the model information data described above. The reason why the data having the prescribed capacity is read out in this way is to enable the method to be similarly applied to other models without correcting the program code.

  The effect control program causes the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate specific page drawing data as drawing data corresponding to a specific page among a plurality of pages from the model information data read as described above, and is not illustrated. Store in the frame buffer. When drawing data is stored in this frame buffer, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a further synchronizes with the V blank signal output to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and displays the specific page drawing data in this frame buffer on the upper plate side liquid crystal display. Output to the device 244.

  Then, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 executes drawing processing based on the inputted drawing data in synchronization with the V blank signal received from the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, and displays the corresponding frame in the display area. In this way, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a first displays an introduction page representing the model theme “FIRE DYNAMITE KING”, for example, as shown in FIG. (Specific page drawing control means).

  In this way, even if a player encounters an unknown game machine in a game hall where no booklet with explanations of game methods and game specifications is installed at all, or a sufficiently large number is not installed. Because, instead of referring to the booklet, you can browse the page explaining the outline of the overall game flow for the unknown gaming machine, so it is sufficient to know the gaming specifications accurately without losing the gaming method. You can enjoy the game.

  On the other hand, as a gaming machine development company, it is easy for the player to understand the gaming method and the gaming specification intended by the gaming machine developer, so that the gaming specifications are somewhat complicated or the gaming method is rare. In addition, it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the game according to the game specifications in accordance with the intended game method.

  On the other hand, as a game hall, there is no need to newly prepare a corresponding booklet for each type of game machine replaced at an island facility where the frequency of replacement of game machines tends to be high every day. Not only can the maintenance work be reduced, but the reduced amount of the game hall clerk can engage in other work.

  Incidentally, the model information data described above is composed of a set of page unit model information data 4610za to 4610zz corresponding to a plurality of pages, as shown in FIG. 67A, and each page unit model information data. In 4610za to 4610zz, prescribed page break information 4160z arranged from the prescribed start address for each page is provided at the head. As shown in FIG. 67B, the page break information 4160z includes, for example, production type information 4160za, previous page start address 4160zb, and next page start address 4160zc of 2 bytes each from the start address of each page. . This effect type information is information relating to the type of effect content described in each corresponding page, and represents information such as “reach effect”, for example. The previous page start address 4160zb, when there is a previous page of the currently displayed page among a plurality of pages, specifies the position of the storage area storing the page unit model information data used for displaying the previous page Represents the start address. On the other hand, the next page start address 4160zc indicates the position of the storage area in which the page unit model information data used for displaying the next page is stored when there is a next page of the page currently displayed among the plurality of pages. It represents the specified starting address.

  In such a configuration, the production control program has the model information data corresponding to each model (and the plurality of page unit model information constituting the model) over the specified capacity from the specified start address to the specified end address. Data). That is, the effect control program reads the model information data from the model information data area 4160bb starting from the specified start address even if the models are different. On the other hand, the effect control program reads each page unit model information data of each page corresponding to each model over a specified capacity from the specified start address to the specified end address. That is, the effect control program reads the model information data from the model information data area 4160bb starting from the specified start address even if the models are different.

  As described above, in the state where the introduction page (hereinafter referred to as “the current page”) is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the effect control program is predetermined on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 as shown in FIG. Triggered when the contact state sliding from the lower left to the upper right is detected as an opportunity, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is turned to the predetermined direction, for example, the page from the left to the right along the sliding contact state. Based on the page break information 4160 of the page, page unit model information data is read from the next page start address 4160zc included in the page over the space of the specified unit capacity, and the page model information for one page to be displayed next. Page drawing data (hereinafter referred to as “next page drawing data”) is generated from the data, and this next page is generated. Writes drawing data into the frame buffer described above, in synchronism with the V blanking signal is output to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Then, on the upper side liquid crystal display device 244, a page explaining the outline of the overall game flow is displayed as the next page of the booklet information based on the next page drawing data as shown in FIG. The

  On the other hand, in the state where the page explaining the outline of the overall game flow (referred to as “this page” at the present time) is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 as described above, the effect control program executes the contact surface of the touch panel 246. , When the contact state sliding from right to left, for example, from right to left is detected, the page break information of this page when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is turned in the predetermined direction along the slide contact state Based on 4160z, page unit model information data is read from the previous page start address 4160zb included in this area over a space of a prescribed unit capacity, and the page model information data for one page to be displayed retroactively. Drawing data (hereinafter referred to as “previous page drawing data”) is generated, and the previous page drawing data is generated. Written in the frame buffer as described above the data, in synchronization with the V blanking signal is output to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Then, the upper platen side liquid crystal display device 244 returns to the page representing the model theme and displays it as the previous page of the booklet information based on the previous page drawing data.

[18-2. Automatic page display]
By the way, under the predetermined background described above, the player operates the launching handle with one hand to launch the game ball, so the booklet page must be touched only with the other hand. In many cases, the player proceeds to the next game before reaching the desired page on which the explanation corresponding to the progress of the game is described.

  In order to eliminate such inconvenience, in the present embodiment, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program is added to the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the booklet information composed of a plurality of pages is displayed, and then a specific page corresponding to the progress of the game is automatically displayed from among the plurality of pages constituting the booklet information.

  In order to exhibit such a function, the model information data prepared in advance in the model information data area 4160bb of the liquid crystal and sound ROM 4160b includes page break information 4160z for each page, as shown in FIG. In addition to the next page start address and the previous page start address, production type information corresponding to the description content of the page is included as described above. As the effect type information, for example, for the page unit model information data used to display the page including the commentary contents regarding the reach effect, the page break information 4160z located at the start address is “reach effect”. The information shown can be mentioned.

  Specifically, the production control program, for example, as an example of the production condition, the reach condition for executing the reach production (specific production operation) described above or a specific reach condition (production condition) among the reach conditions. As a result of the establishment of the event (effect lottery means), “reach effect” among the effect type information of the page break information 4160z of the plurality of page unit model information data constituting the model information data uniformly read as described above. The page unit model information data corresponding to is searched (model information data control means). That is, the effect control program finds page unit model information data associated with the established reach condition among the plurality of page unit model information data in the model information data used for displaying the plurality of pages.

  Next, the production control program generates drawing data from the page unit model information data and outputs it to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means). As an example of the specific production operation, as a specific page related to the reach production, for example, an explanation page related to the reach production as shown in FIG. 119 is automatically displayed (page automatic display control means). It should be noted that the specific page to be automatically displayed in this way is not limited to the reach effect as described above, but may be related to other effect operations or other information.

  In this embodiment, the player basically becomes easy to pay attention to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that performs the variable display of the decorative symbols, but the reach effect is an example of the effect operation according to the progress of the game. Is executed, an explanation regarding the reach effect as the effect operation is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means). Therefore, even a player who is playing with an unfamiliar pachinko machine 1 can ensure that commentary corresponding to the progress of an unfamiliar game is made at an appropriate timing without impairing the visibility of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. Since it can be referred to, it becomes possible to enjoy the game while accurately grasping the original game performance. In addition, the player can fully enjoy the gameability after accurately understanding the game specifications intended by the developer of the game machine one by one along the progress of the game.

[18-3. Standing role demonstration]
By the way, in general, a recent gaming machine is equipped with a gaming board characterized according to a theme set for each model, and when a game is started, a movable accessory provided on the gaming board is used. It is rarely activated suddenly to surprise the player so that the player's interest is not exhausted (see the first reference above). Thus, even in a gaming machine having a movable decoration body 3250 on a gaming board, for example, during a demonstration production, it is common that a movable accessory is stored. For this reason, the operating mode of the movable body is hard to imagine for visitors who are searching for a desired pachinko machine and patrols the aisle of the game hall. Often it was difficult to get started.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control program first receives a command (command) output by the main control board 4100 (command receiving means), and the game ball is received from the main control board 4100 to the start port 2101. A state in which a command (in this case, a start opening winning command (start opening winning command) is illustrated) is not received (hereinafter referred to as a non-game state) continues for about 30 seconds (a specified period). Then, this is detected (non-game state detecting means). Note that the effect control program may be based on whether or not another command is received in order to detect the non-game state.

  Next, the production control program executes the origin return program for performing the origin return process described above (hereinafter simply referred to as “origin”) when such a non-gaming state continues for the specified period. The movable decorative body 3250 (movable accessory) is actuated in a prescribed manner (demonstration control means).

  In this way, even if a new control is not added by using the existing origin return process, a visitor who is tricking the aisle of the game hall can, for example, change the behavior of the movable accessory that characterizes game play. In order to be blessed with the opportunity to come in contact, before the game, you will experience the operating mode of the movable actors characterized in this way, and the operating mode of such mobile actors will be implemented in any situation in the actual game It will be easy to reach the psychology of trying to start the game.

  Further, the effect control program turns on the power when the movable decoration body 3250 is actuated in the specified operation mode in the above-described origin return process, when a new start opening command (start prize command) is received. After the time process is interrupted, a process of moving the movable decorative body 3250 from the interrupted position to the specified storage position (hereinafter, also referred to as “origin return process after the demonstration interruption”) is executed (control means after the demonstration interruption) ).

[18-4. Actuation of an accessory by touching a booklet]
By the way, under the above-mentioned predetermined background, the player can grasp the outline of the game specifications superficially by referring to the booklet. For example, regarding the behavior of the movable decorative body 3250. It is difficult to grasp unless the game is actually started, and it is difficult to convey the game using the movable decorative body 3250.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, liquid crystal and sound are triggered when a contact state (hereinafter referred to as “first prescribed contact state”) on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) of the touch unit 220B is detected. The upper unit side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) on the touch unit 220B is based on the model information data uniformly read from the model information data storage area 4160bb (specified storage area) of the ROM 4160b (production control storage means). After displaying information related to the game viewed by the player as a substitute for the booklet, a specific content related to the movable decorative body 3250 is displayed as a part of the information related to the game in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The contact state in the part of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) corresponding to the position where it is applied It triggered (the "contact state of the second specified") that has been detected, actuating the movable decorative body 3250 (the movable won game) in behavior corresponding to a specific content being the display.

  Specifically, the presentation control program reads the model information data from the model information data area 4160bb as described above (model information data control means), and a plurality of page unit model information data included in the read model information data. The drawing data is generated in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a from the specific page unit model information data and is output to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is specified among the plurality of pages described above. 118, a page related to the notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “notice effect page”) as shown in FIG. 118 is displayed (specific page display control means).

  In this notice effect page, regarding the notice effect using the bomb king character named “Mite-kun”, for example, it is expressed that the degree of expectation for the jackpot changes depending on the color, and the behavior of the character is flat. Is represented. When this character is red, it is suggested that one of the four behaviors of “Normal”, “Rolling”, “Rocket” and “Monster” is selected and displayed on this notice effect page. ing. The four types of icons indicating these behavior modes include an icon 246 </ b> Z representing the “rolling” behavior.

  Thus, a visitor of the game hall that touches the notice effect page displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B is interested in the behavior of the movable decorative body 3250, for example, and is controlled by the control of the effect control program. Touching an icon 246Z that is visible through the operation surface of the touch panel 246 in the notice effect page (specific page) displayed in the display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means).

  Then, in the effect control program, an icon 246Z representing a specific behavior is displayed as a specific content related to the movable decorative body 3250 (movable accessory) as a part of the information related to the game content in such a notice effect page. The origin return process may be executed as described above when the specified contact state is detected on the part of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) corresponding to the present position. Instead, for example, as a specific behavior intended by the displayed icon 246Z, a drive signal for rotating the movable ornament 3250 in one direction is given to a motor (not shown), or the movable ornament 3250 The driving signal for rotating in the direction is repeatedly applied to a motor (not shown), and the rolling operation of the movable decorative body 3250 is performed as a specified operation mode. It is an aspect to repeat (hereinafter referred to as "rolling mode") (simulation operation control means).

  As a specific method for realizing such a mode of repeating the rolling of the movable decorative body 3250, the following method is employed in the present embodiment. First, the peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores the various schedule data described above stores specific schedule data corresponding to the effect pattern that is operated in a manner in which the movable decorative body 3250 is repeatedly rolled.

  The effect control program is an effect pattern for operating in a mode (hereinafter referred to as a “rolling mode”) of repeating the rolling of the movable decorative body 3250 among a plurality of schedule data respectively corresponding to a plurality of performance patterns, for example, from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Select and read specific schedule data corresponding to. As described above, the production control program is triggered by the detection of the prescribed contact state on the contact surface covering the icon 246Z corresponding to the movable ornament 3250, according to the selected specific schedule data. Although the effect control is executed by driving a motor (not shown) for driving the body 3250, other effects for driving the effect device (speaker, etc.) other than the movable decorative body 3250 in the specific schedule data at this time. Other schedule data used for the control is masked (schedule mask means), and the specific actor performance schedule data used for the remaining production control is extracted.

  The effect control program outputs a drive signal to the motor via a drive mechanism (not shown) in accordance with the specific accessory performance schedule data used for the remaining effect control. Then, the movable decorative body 3250 is operated in such a manner that rolling is repeated left and right in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 122 by the action of a drive mechanism (not shown).

  In this way, if the booklet described above is not available, or if the booklet is available and the outline of the game specifications can be grasped by the visitor of the game hall, for example, what operating mode the movable decorative body 3250 actually has Even if it is difficult to grasp whether or not the game is not actually started, the game can be started after the visitors of the game hall experience the operating mode of the movable decorative body 3250.

[18-5. Background introduction]
By the way, under the above-mentioned predetermined background, the player can grasp the outline of the game specification to some extent by referring to the booklet described above, but the game specification is particularly in particular when the character itself that characterizes the game machine is not known. When it is related to the character, the game specification cannot be grasped in detail, and there is a possibility that the gameability cannot be fully enjoyed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the effect control program displays, for example, a special symbol in a variably displayed manner, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 controls the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. As described above, triggered by the fact that a prescribed contact state has been detected in the part of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 corresponding to the position where a specific character (specific display part) is displayed as a part of information relating to the game. Information related to a specific character (specific display part) is provided based on the model information data.

  In this way, even if the player is not familiar with the character that characterizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 (corresponding to “Mito-kun” described above), it corresponds to the position of the character displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. If a part of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is touched with a finger, as information related to the character, for example, if the character appears in a certain work in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, for example, As an introduction of the background, for example, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), the family structure of the character in the original work that is the original is introduced, or at least one story of the original work that is the theme of the character By introducing the part, knowledge about the character can be obtained to some extent. Here, pachinko gaming machines based on the theme of a specific character generally have a gaming specification related to the specific character. Therefore, if there is an opportunity to come into contact with the introduction of the background as described above, even if the player is not familiar with the character that characterizes the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player understands the game specifications related to this character in more detail. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the effect control program is a part of the information related to the game in the specific page displayed by the specific page display control means as described above in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means). As a trigger, when the specified contact state is detected in the part of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) corresponding to the position where the character (specific display part) is displayed, Based on the background information data related to the information data and used to introduce the background regarding the specific character (specific display part), the background introduction regarding the specific character is visually displayed on the specific page. (Specific information display control means)

  In addition, as information related to such a character, for example, a word explaining a story related to the character in the jackpot gaming state is displayed, or the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has its own brand or It can be mentioned that the wording that appeals the company's model is displayed.

  On the other hand, background introduction regarding such a character may be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 instead of or in addition to being displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 as described above. In this way, the player concentrates on the game without overlooking the variation display mode of the decorative symbols, and at the same time, it becomes easy to grasp the game specifications related to the character characterizing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in detail.

  On the other hand, the production control program, as described above, instead of visually displaying the background introduction regarding the character on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 or the like, or in combination, a low-frequency speaker of the speaker unit 920, a high-frequency top not shown. From the speaker, the left speaker of the left speaker unit 430, the right speaker of the right speaker unit 246, or any combination thereof, similar to the player or the attendee of the game hall by hearing equivalent to the background introduction related to the character described above. You may be made to recognize the contents of. That is, the effect control program, as described above (by the specific information display control means), displays liquid crystal and sound control under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a when the background introduction regarding the specific character is displayed on the specific page. Based on this background information data, the section 4160 is made to audibly output a background introduction regarding a specific character (specific information sound output control means).

  At this time, the production control program outputs the same contents as those described above by using a directional speaker among these speakers. You may make it tell.

[19. Capture & Release]
[19-1. Freeze]
By the way, in recent pachinko machines, a high-performance graphic chip is mounted, and an effect display according to the progress of the game is realized while displaying images of various display modes one after another. However, in recent pachinko machines, even when a plurality of videos having similar display modes are to be displayed continuously, the drawing process for forming each video must be executed individually, and the efficient drawing process Could not be realized.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to efficiently perform drawing processing when continuously displaying a plurality of videos having similar display modes. In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control means) The drawing data generated when the display operation using the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) is executed under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, for example, is variably displayed when the drawing data is generated. It is left until any point within the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and is reused as follows in the subsequent display operation using the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In the present embodiment, the effect control program reuses the generated drawing data in this way, instead of or together with the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as a display means. The drawing data generated when executing the display operation may be performed. In the following description, it is assumed that the effect control program is reused in the display operation using the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as an example.

  The configuration described above will be described more specifically. The peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control ROM 4150b (effect control storage) that stores a plurality of schedule data used for controlling the effect operation according to the success / failure status of the aforementioned effect conditions. Means), the aforementioned built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as “frame buffer”) in which drawing data corresponding to a frame to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) is stored, and the frame buffer stored in the frame buffer. Peripheral control MPU 4150a (display control means) for controlling the display operation using the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 by transferring the drawing data to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the above-mentioned plural Drawing according to the schedule data selected according to the established production conditions described above A sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) that outputs the V blank signal (timing control signal) for each preset period while generating the data and storing the generated drawing data in the frame buffer. Yes.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a screen display image based on the drawing data of the frame buffer and the processing buffer. FIG. 124 shows a case where a material image is selected and arranged on the frame buffer side and a video effect is displayed on the processing buffer side. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that it applies. FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state in which a desired video effect is applied on the processing buffer side, and FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example of a video to which a desired video effect is applied.

  FIG. 123 shows an example of a frame display mode that is scheduled to be displayed based on the drawing data in the frame buffer, and shows that the frame has passed as time progresses from the left to the right. An example of a frame display mode scheduled to be displayed based on the drawing data fetched from the frame buffer into the processing buffer is shown.

  The effect control program takes out drawing data for each frame stored in the frame buffer as shown in the upper part of FIG. 123 at a desired timing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (display control means) (hereinafter “capture”). Expressed). Furthermore, the effect control program controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a to add a video effect addition command (specified) to instruct that a video effect to be described later should be added to the frame to be displayed based on the captured drawing data for each frame. Are output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In the present embodiment, as the desired video effect, for example, an atmosphere in which the frame is frozen can be cited.

  When the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a video effect addition command (a specified video effect addition command) from the peripheral control MPU 4150a (display control means), the time when the video effect addition command is received triggered by the reception of the video effect addition command The drawing data for each frame generated and temporarily stored over a certain area from the first address (for one frame) to the last address of the frame buffer in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) ), The data is once read out and extracted as shown in the lower part of FIG. 123 using the word “capture” (frame capturing means).

  Further, the peripheral control board 4140 described above displays the drawing data for each frame extracted as described above as a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “currently being displayed for variation”) when the drawing data for each frame is generated. RAM (hereinafter referred to as “processing buffer (temporary storage means)”) that temporarily stores it so as to remain until any particular point in time during the fluctuation time of “special symbol”. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a is repeatedly stored in the frame buffer so as to overwrite the generated drawing data for each frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, or secured and released as necessary by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Is stored in the machining buffer. This effect control program is applied to the drawing data for each frame stored in the processing buffer in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (video effect adding means) under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125, drawing data is generated for each frame after the processing for performing the process of giving the atmosphere that the frame is frozen. Then, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a gives a video effect to the drawing data of the processing buffer, and the original video is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 using the processed drawing data as shown in FIG. The frame that is the display mode of the atmosphere as if it was frozen is displayed.

  The production control program has a built-in sound source triggered by the reception of, for example, a V blank signal (timing control signal) from the peripheral control MPU 4150a until a specific point in time within the fluctuation time of the special symbol currently being displayed. The VDP 4160a again stores the drawing data for each frame after the processing in the frame buffer (restore means).

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the V blank signal from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an opportunity, reads out the drawing data for each frame after processing from the frame buffer as its built-in RAM, and outputs it to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. ing. In the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, when drawing data for each frame after the processing is input, the display area is displayed on the display area as shown in FIG. 126, for example, based on the drawing data for each frame after the processing. The frame that creates the frozen atmosphere as described above is displayed.

  With such a configuration, when the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source tries to apply a desired video effect to the video based on the drawing data for each frame once created in the frame buffer, the drawing data for each frame already created is created. By extracting and reusing the image, it becomes unnecessary to separately generate drawing data for each new frame having the desired video effect. As a result, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a can omit the process of generating the drawing data for each new frame to which the desired video effect is applied from the beginning, and accordingly can spend processing capacity for other drawing processes. Therefore, the drawing process can be executed efficiently when a plurality of videos having similar display modes are continuously displayed.

  Here, while the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is displaying the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol during the variable display, there is a tendency that the video of the display mode is repeatedly displayed particularly in the same manner. Therefore, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extends to any particular point in time within the variation time of the special symbol currently being displayed, that is, within a temporal range that does not straddle the variation time of the special symbol currently being varied. When drawing data for each frame is reused as described above, in particular, drawing processing for repeatedly generating drawing data for a plurality of videos having the same display mode is often repeatedly executed. The drawing process can be executed well. In this way, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a reduces the burden of the drawing process, and accordingly, the effect control program executes the drawing process for other images under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and more various effects. By executing the display, it is possible to obtain a game mode that further attracts the player's interest visually.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the rendering control program displays the drawing data once generated when the display operation using the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) is executed, when the drawing data is generated. It is left until any point in time when the special symbol is changed, and is reused in the subsequent display operation using the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Instead, as follows. Also good. That is, the rendering control program displays the drawing data once generated when the display operation using the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) is executed, for example, at the time when the drawing data is generated. It is left until any time within the variation time of the special symbol that is variably displayed after the variation time of the special symbol, and is reused in the subsequent display operation using the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Anyway.

[19-2. Paste additional]
By the way, as described above, in recent pachinko machines, even when a plurality of videos having similar display modes are continuously displayed, the drawing process for forming each video has to be executed individually. A typical drawing process could not be realized. In the case where such a problem exists, an object is to efficiently perform a drawing process when a plurality of videos having similar display modes are continuously displayed. In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect The control means) generates drawing data for each frame in the frame buffer, and instead of outputting the generated drawing data for each frame to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means), for example, A new material image in which a new material image is arranged in a frame based on the drawing data for each extracted frame is left until any point in the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is variably displayed when the drawing data is generated. Generates rendering data for each frame after processing used to display the frame, and renders rendering data for each frame after the processing. Transferred to the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 after being stored again in the frame buffer. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display control program reuses the generated drawing data in this manner as a display means instead of or in addition to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. You may make it perform about the drawing data produced | generated when performing the display operation of the liquid crystal display device 244. FIG. In the following description, it is assumed that the effect control program is reused in the display operation using the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as an example.

  The above-described configuration will be described more specifically. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the video effect addition command (specified video effect addition command) from the peripheral control MPU 4150a (display control means) as described above, as shown in FIG. As shown in the lower part, after drawing data for each frame is captured in the processing buffer (temporary storage means) (frame capturing means), a specified additional pasting command (specified additional pasting) is performed from the peripheral control MPU 4150a (display control means). In response to the receipt of the additional paste command, a new material image is generated as a new material image in a frame based on the drawing data for each frame temporarily stored in the processing buffer. As shown in the lower part of Fig. 128, the frozen puffer is shown and placed. And generates drawing data for each frame after processing used in the display of a new frame (added pasting means).

  The effect control program confirms that the V blank signal (timing control signal) has been received from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) until any specific time within the variation time of the special symbol under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. As a trigger, drawing data for each frame after the processing is stored again (hereinafter also referred to as “release”) in a certain area extending from the head address to the last address of the frame buffer (restore means).

  Then, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a gives a video effect to the drawing data in the processing buffer under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and uses the processed drawing data to additionally paste it to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. As shown in FIG. 129, as the attached material image, a frozen puffer is pasted on the near side of the original image and a frame which is a display mode of an atmosphere in which the whole is frozen is displayed.

  With such a configuration, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a renders a subsequent video having a similar display mode after a video based on rendering data for each frame once created in the frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “original video”). When trying to generate data, the drawing data for each frame that has already been created is taken out and reused, so that the drawing data excluding the material image newly added in the subsequent video, that is, the original video is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to generate the drawing data for each frame again. As a result, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a can omit the process of generating the drawing data for the subsequent video from the beginning, and accordingly can spend processing capacity for other drawing processes. Accordingly, when a plurality of videos having similar display modes are continuously displayed, the drawing process can be executed efficiently, but even when such a similar drawing process is repeatedly executed, Since the load of the drawing process becomes lighter than that, it is possible to execute various other drawing processes correspondingly and realize various display effects that attract the player's interest.

[19-3. Group expansion]
By the way, in recent pachinko machines, as described above, a large number of material images whose display modes are similar to each other are continuously displayed to indicate that the player is likely to reach an advantageous state as the game progresses. The specified video may be displayed. In such a recent pachinko machine, a drawing process for arranging a large number of material images must be executed for each specific video to form the specific video, which tends to increase the burden of the drawing process. It was. In the present embodiment, when such a problem exists, the present embodiment aims to efficiently execute a drawing process for forming a specific video in which a plurality of material images whose display modes are similar to each other are arranged as a background or foreground. The effect control program extracts a part of the drawing data from the drawing data generated when the display operation using the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) is executed under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and then As a subsequent display operation, the game board side liquid crystal display displays a video of a display mode in which a plurality of specific material images based on the part of the disease data are arranged as a background or foreground as the subsequent display operation. It is displayed on the device 1900.

The configuration described above will be described more specifically. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the group display command (specified group display command) from the peripheral control MPU 4150a (display control means) as described above, and the right side of FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, when drawing the group display command (specified group display command), a part of the drawing data corresponding to the group display command is drawn out of the drawing data for each frame temporarily stored in the frame buffer. Extract (frame extraction means).

  Here, examples of information included in such a group display command include a sprite number of a sprite (material image) corresponding to a part of the drawing data, a coordinate value of a pasting position in the frame, and the like. it can. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a group display command including such information to the VDP 4160a regarding sprites to be group-displayed at a timing at which a group display effect to be described later is to be executed.

  The VDP 4160a controls the sprite (specific material image) based on a part of the drawing data extracted as described above (by the frame extraction unit) under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a background or foreground as shown in FIG. Generate drawing data for each frame after processing for displaying a new video (in this embodiment, a video of a school of fish “group video” is taken as an example) arranged in an arrangement mode according to a group display command (Material arrangement means).

  Specifically, the VDP 4160a specifies sprite data (corresponding to the partial drawing data) to be used by at least one sprite number included in the group display command described above, and is also included in the group display command. A coordinate value in the frame corresponding to the sprite number of the sprite data is specified. Accordingly, when the VDP 4160a receives such a group command, the VDP 4160a displays a drawing for displaying an image in a mode in which at least one sprite in the frame is arranged at various positions in the frame specified by the coordinate values. Generate data. Note that the method for specifying the material image of the group video is not limited to a method of specifying in units of sprites, but may be a method of specifying a material image obtained by cutting out a part of the frame over a desired range.

  As described above, the peripheral control board 4140 is equipped with a processing buffer (temporary storage means) that temporarily stores drawing data for each frame after processing, and the effect control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. After receiving a timing control signal (V blank signal) from the VDP 4160a, drawing data for each processed frame is read from the processing buffer and stored again in the frame buffer (restore means).

  In this way, the VDP 4160a creates a plurality of drawing data for displaying a certain video on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the frame buffer, and then separately arranges a plurality of sprites (material images) that are a part of the video. When trying to generate drawing data used to display a group video (specific video) in the display mode, the drawing data for the group video is reused by reusing part of the drawing data that has already been created. Need not be generated from the beginning. As a result, the VDP 4160a can omit the drawing data generation process for the group video, and accordingly can spend processing capacity for other drawing processes. Accordingly, it is possible to efficiently perform drawing processing when continuously displaying a group video in which a plurality of sprites are arranged, and even when such a similar drawing processing is repeatedly executed, Since the burden of the drawing process is reduced, it is possible to realize a variety of effect displays that attract the player's interest by executing another drawing process accordingly.

[20. Preload (prefetch drawing information)]
By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine described in the first reference, the first access takes a long time when reading each material image data in the NAND ROM employed as the character ROM. Before the graphic chip such as the sound source built-in VDP4160a reads out a large amount of material image data necessary for displaying a predetermined frame constituting the video from such a NAND-type non-volatile ROM, drawing processing of the next frame is started. It can be thought that it will be done. Therefore, in such a case, there is a possibility that so-called frame dropping may occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the purpose is to suppress the disturbance of the video caused by the delay in reading the material image data from the NAND ROM 4160b as the NAND nonvolatile memory, and to make it difficult for the player to visually discomfort. On the control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4150a (display control means) uses a NAND ROM 4160b (NAND nonvolatile memory) for a plurality of material image data (hereinafter, sprite data is exemplified) necessary for displaying a predetermined frame constituting the video. ) Is read out in time, the sprite data necessary for displaying the previous frame displayed before the predetermined frame is read out from the NAND ROM 4160b to a material image RAM (not shown). Display the predetermined frame in advance. So that should read the part of sprite data of a plurality of sprite data necessary. The material image RAM may be a memory provided outside the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, instead of being a part of the built-in memory of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In the following embodiments, reading in advance in this way is also referred to as “preload”. Hereinafter, such preload will be described in detail.

  FIG. 132 and FIG. 133 are diagrams each illustrating an example of a state in which preloading is performed using an empty time area. In the example shown in the figure, the vertical axis indicates the total time required for sprite data that needs to be read from the NAND ROM 4160b for each frame, and the horizontal axis indicates the identifier of each effect. It is supposed to be. In the illustrated example, strips extending in the vertical axis direction are arranged along the horizontal axis direction. However, the length of each strip is determined by at least one sprite data necessary for displaying each frame. This corresponds to the total reading time (second total required time) necessary for reading. Hereinafter, the total reading time of sprite data for each frame is also expressed as “total time required for each frame”.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a (display control means) refers to the screen generation schedule data in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and confirms the screen data that is arranged in time series and defines the screen configuration. Here, in the peripheral control board 4140, since the speed at which the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the sprite data is determined to some extent according to the adopted NAND ROM 4160b, the peripheral control MPU 4150a manages the read time required for reading each sprite data. doing.

  In this embodiment, for example, in the Nth period, the peripheral control MPU 4150a generates sprite data necessary for displaying each frame constituting the video based on the screen generation schedule data in which the video to be displayed is defined. The total required time Tmax (first total required time) required for reading from the material image RAM (not shown) from the (NAND nonvolatile memory) is due to the restriction on the reading speed of the sprite data from the NAND ROM 4160b. It is determined in advance whether or not the predetermined threshold time is to be exceeded (first readability prediction means).

  Here, in this embodiment, the Nth period and the later-described N-1 period, for example, have a special symbol belonging to one fluctuation time as an example. For example, the N-1 period has so many materials. In the following description, it is assumed that the (N-1) th period is a period during which a special screen using a larger number of material images is displayed while the normal screen without using an image is displayed.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the total required time Tmax related to a predetermined frame in each frame group is scheduled to exceed the specified threshold time Tt, the total required time Tmax in the frame group is a specified threshold value. The following determination processing is performed regarding the drawing processing of the previous frame displayed before the predetermined frame determined to be over the time Tt. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, based on the screen data group included in the screen generation schedule data, displays the previous frame displayed before the predetermined frame (here, the N-1 period before that). The total required time (second total required time) in units of frames required to read the sprite data required for display of any frame to be displayed) from the NAND-type ROM 4160b to the material image RAM is the specified value. It is determined whether or not it is less than the threshold time Tt (second readability prediction unit).

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the total required time in the frame unit with respect to the previous frame is less than the predetermined threshold time Tt, is read out beyond the predetermined threshold time Tt among the sprite data necessary for the predetermined frame. The part of the raw material image data (corresponding to the broken line portion in the figure) is a free time area (corresponding to the free time area in the figure) that is the difference between the prescribed threshold time Tt and the total required time in the frame unit. Then, it is determined whether or not reading from the NAND ROM 4160b is completed (reading permission confirmation means).

  When the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the partial sprite data has been read out in the free time area, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is scheduled to read out over the prescribed threshold time Tt of the sprite data necessary for the predetermined frame. Using a free time area (corresponding to the “free time area” shown in the figure) that is a difference between a predetermined threshold time Tt and the total required time for each frame, a part of sprite data (broken line part shown in the figure) For example, when the sprite data necessary for displaying any one of the frames in the (N−1) period executed before that is read out, it is read out in advance (free time utilization means).

  As described above, when an inexpensive NAND-type nonvolatile memory is used for the NAND-type ROM 4160b as a so-called character ROM, it takes a lot of time to read a plurality of sprite data from the NAND-type ROM 4160b when drawing each frame. At first glance, there is a possibility that the drawing process of one frame may not be completed within a preset period, but in the present embodiment, a process for reading out some sprite data that is not in time Is completed during the previous frame. For this reason, all the sprite data necessary for each frame will be in time for the drawing process. Therefore, the video is not disturbed due to the delay in reading the material image data from the NAND ROM 4160b, and the player feels visually uncomfortable. It can be difficult to give.

  Here, a specific preloading method will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a, as a part of the sprite data exceeding the prescribed threshold time Tt in the Nth period in FIG. 132, for example, each sprite data group corresponding to three frames. (The tip portion indicated by a broken line) is divided and distributed to the free time areas of the other three immediately preceding frames so as to correspond to these three frames among the frames in the (N-1) period executed before that. And preload each. When the preload destination is distributed to each frame in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to place a burden on the sprite data read processing necessary for each preload destination frame.

  Further, another specific preloading method will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a, as a part of the sprite data exceeding the prescribed threshold time Tt in the Nth period in FIG. 133, for example, each sprite data group corresponding to three frames. (The tip portion indicated by a broken line) is preloaded by being concentrated in the free time area of the immediately preceding frame among the frames in the N−1 period executed before that. Concentrating on a specific frame as a preload destination in this way places a little burden on the sprite data read processing required for the specific frame at the preload destination, but simple control when trying to preload many sprite data Can handle data uniformly.

  Note that the preload destination frame is a frame that is displayed not only immediately before the Nth period as described above but also before the Nth period in the preceding N-1 period. Also good.

  In the Nth period and the (N-1) th period shown in FIG. 132 and FIG. 133, for example, the number of retained (stored) number of the first or second special symbol in which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is 0. If not (that is, when at least one start memory information is stored in the above-described start memory information storage area for the first or second special symbol), the Nth period and the N-1 period are different. It may be in a form straddling a plurality of fluctuation times (special symbols) corresponding to the start memory information.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, although the said embodiment has mainly shown the case where it applies to a ball-type game machine (pachinko game machine), it is not limited to this, The rotation type game machine (pachislot game machine) mentioned later is used. Can also be applied. Alternatively, this embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a pachislot gaming machine are fused. In either case, the same operational effects as those described above can be obtained.

  As a basic configuration of such a rotating type gaming machine or a gaming machine formed by combining the rotating type gaming machine, for example, a rotating display body (rotating display means) including a plurality of reels (rotating bodies) with a plurality of types of symbols, A housing provided with the rotating display, an operating lever (first operating means) provided outside the housing, and a plurality of devices provided outside the housing corresponding to the plurality of reels, respectively. And a stop button (second operation means), wherein the plurality of reels are rotated by the operation of the operation lever (corresponding to the establishment of the start condition) as a trigger. Rotating body control means for stopping the rotation of each corresponding reel according to the operation sequence of the buttons, and an internal lottery for determining whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied when the start lever is operated Run Game control means (main control board described above) having lottery means and game state control means for shifting from the normal game state to the special game state advantageous to the player after the predetermined winning condition is satisfied 4100) and production control means for controlling the production operation according to the establishment condition of the predetermined winning condition by the control of the game control means (substantially equivalent to the function of the peripheral control board 4140 described above) The display control means performs display operation as a part of the effect operation (substantially equivalent to the function of the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above), and is attached to the plurality of reels under the control of the game control means. A payout device (payout hand) for performing a game medium payout operation according to a combination mode of a plurality of symbols stopped in a symbol display area in which a variation mode of the plurality of symbols is visually recognized ) And it includes a.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Door frame, 4 ... Main body frame, 5 ... Game board, 4110 ... Discharge control board (payout control means), 4100 ... Main control board (game control means) 4140 ... Peripheral control board (production control means).

Claims (3)

Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A plurality of production means for performing the production operation;
Production operation execution means for executing production operations by the plurality of production means respectively.
Production control means for controlling the production operation by outputting production control data to the production operation execution means according to an instruction from the game control means,
With
The production control means includes
Information storage means in which the effect control data can be temporarily stored;
When controlling the effect operations of the plurality of effect means, the effect control data is extracted from the information storage means at the same time so as to control the effects in synchronism with the plurality of effect means at a normal time. When the above condition is satisfied, a part of the plurality of presentation means is obtained by extracting the presentation control data from the information storage means at a timing different from that of the other presentation means. Response control means for starting the effect control at a timing different from the other effect means;
A gaming machine comprising: Provided with an operation means for outputting an operation signal according to an external operation mode,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined condition is triggered by detection of the operation signal as the operation means is operated. The production means is
A drive unit for driving based on the production control data;
A movable accessory that operates in a predetermined manner by the drive unit;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: